Home

2012 Dodge Charger Owner`s Manual

1. 0 70 71 73 79 E dende ge aG oueee EERS een S pus d Pda Do Front Seat 56 xus oe RE AA bbe es 43 44 INSPCCHON PP m 83 Operating Instructions s op 644548444 44 PACteNSIONGIS ses pee nex ea Se Gon d exp a d E 54 Rea DEDE ocu ae Bae oa ne eo Sri d Siete E 43 knie istine Procede sense V9 ao ee 49 c 64 4 ese eh eee seen ORE AE tae ee oo 178 Peasy EDE E 195 Head ISesttamis zx 22094 ited yatera 188 lnc a aub RA wees s beara nner eas we 181 TCIGHEAGIUSHNENt ses dux px edi 178 MOMO payri ve dd eke bb teehee teed a 192 PLOWBE os ou oh DEE RERS ER EED ou ee DE 178 Rea DOGS oos sos chase SR ee ke S 190 Seatback Release ess 190 ju oes oos REELE ELE he Beas ewes 178 Security Alarm Theft Alarm ses EES wars 6 He 17 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 509 539 Selection of Oil cic mw 4 aoe MERE nee wae 496 Sentry Key immobilizer iss ws sone 15 Sentry Key Programming iis gee ORREL WER acs V Sentry Key Replacement 524556256 dse 4 ES RE 16 Service Assistance eee eee eae 559 Service Contract au ou EER owe ee ROSE ee Bee Hs 561 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator EE SS eee 289 Service Manuals ee eee 563 vhi n fot eine SES SU ee ee BU ee 365 Automatic Transmission 365 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 48 Shoulder Belts 246644406464 ERR 64 684465 43 Side Airbag Signals Turn 584 INDEX M Slippery
2. 004 28 d Power Door Locks ue qax 4 als ee RR Re es 29 o Child Protection Door Lock System Rear lb Tm ol W Keyless Enter N Go 000 0005 32 OM Gl METER IE EE EE RE eens 36 O ower WNdOwWS se ex 3 edv p om Be eo Rene SR 36 O Wind Buffetng ue oos sae EE EE ak AR ER 99 W Trunk Lock And Release ee 39 W Trunk Safety Warning 4 40 O Irunk Emergency Release 422542242644 HE 41 W Occupant Restraints 000 41 El Lap Shoulder DENS ou iu Des Bi bc BR AE 43 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 49 O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 49 o Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR IE POUIPPCO Mines 445 635545 IHR ehe DE 50 O Energy Management Feature 51 NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 El Seat belt Pretemsioners eire tae sn o1 EG ld bes POUS 4 55 55 n4o oso RR oe E 70 O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System lBl Engine Break In Recommendations 81 ad Eee ae XE n up MM uo ees ee et EE tuus ee oi Transporting Passengers vc was wes 82 ET ed Belt PXICNCE as os iii ia RARR e 53 mr N nc co oe N 82 REM ee O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The TER EE EN EE ET DEE EET 54 NONO TU 83 O Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 62 3 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make O Event Data Recorder EDR 69 Outside The Vehicle 85 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YO
3. Child Protection Door Lock Location 021835328 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock knob up unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle KEYLESS ENTER N GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle s Remote Keyless Entry RKE system and a feature of Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons 021835322 NOTE e Passive Entry may be programmed ON OFF refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your WARNING Instrument Panel for further information e If wearing gloves on your hands or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle the unlock sensitivity can be affected resulting in a slower re sponse time Child Protection Door Lock Function Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 e If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds the vehicle will re lock and if equipped will arm the theft alarm To Unlock From The Driver s Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of th
4. C T 437 Event Data Rec rdet 123592 339 54 09 du xd d 69 Exhaust Gas Caution lesen 82 439 Idas cbe cic OPEN 82 506 Exterior Folding Mitiore 222 iS onbe ORE 96 EXISHOP TIS HUS ses os RE ERA deed eR EXE 198 EXISPIOIS LIO BIS 2474646 mach peen EV HR RC AR EA 85 Filler Location Duel ss EES EER ER KERR 290 Filters Air Cleaner 23252244 teehee EERS ES S S 498 Air CONGMONING sce dos koe adea he ER 353 502 Pucine ERROR ET RE ares 498 539 Eneinne Oil Disposal 2 232 x o EER RR RR RR EE 498 Plash Et a su IE ROTTE EL TEE ons 203 574 INDEX NEE NN Flashers Hazard Waning oed 6 BAR Podio ares 464 TU Ia eee sages CR Pal N DEE 85 202 286 Plat Tite Changing sesse dox E es DRS RA N 465 Flexible Fuel Vehicles CIulsin Range ans roe so De ER or Sess aa es 442 Eneme Ol isi PCT C D 442 Fuel Requirements 4 3 make MERE 2445 440 441 Maintenance us daos ore BEE e wee dows 443 Replacement Parts aura canissa aate RES 443 DIEU geen es nemo OE ae oon ee eos 442 Flooded Engine Starting 0 363 Floor Console eee 274 Puid Capacilies 22 0568 athens 39 bant Po dedo 538 Fluid Leaks 2 224222 2222 or m 85 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 517 llic E AR AE AE ee eee eee rE 514 COOUNS VEER 2 sop RARR E MR HARE 509 Pree Ol se RE PRETAS UNES teas 495 Transfer Case SE SE 518 Faid Drake eon se Eie 3x33 ORE AE DAE NS 540 IPIS ERA ON RE N OE 4s owe EE ER b
5. REEDE IEE INTRODUCTION 944 5445 5055 04 084064 S04 ee DR THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 22 2 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B Introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION See INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about you
6. 4 NW m ou y lc sss LU i PF uct Evonumy iW ACC oll Ville Spend inp ime 041041518 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e Radio Info Fuel Economy Vehicle Speed Trip Info e Tire Pressure Vehicle Info Stored Warning Messages Turn Menu OFF NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the UP button to scroll up wheel N ward through the main menu and Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub menus Fuel Economy Ve hicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Messages Trip Info Vehicle Speed and Turn Menu OFF and sub menus DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menu and Ve hicle Info and Trip Info sub menus Fuel Economy Vehicle Info Tire PSI Cruise Mes sages Trip Info Vehicle Speed and Turn Menu OFF and sub menus 040909599 EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button for access gt to main menus sub menus or to select a per sonal setting in the setup menu Press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds to reset features BACK Button Press th
7. 287 304 Oil Piller lange sepes HEARD PCR EUR eee es 498 Oil Filter Selection i s e REEEIRUI MEE RS 498 CIL Eie ee ee a ee I E ES 495 539 enr A 538 Change Interval idee RARIUS 304 496 uu sir Pr be Gd eRe eS ee 495 Dip i ier Roe was a eee enters os ee 495 Disposal ERAS OE ETE EE OS 498 Pilier lods 94 PER eo ED OR ED 498 539 Filter Disposal 45 042 eter abu RR oe eho 3 498 dentine LOO oa 428 HERDER aus 496 Materials Added to amp 52a d LEER E 26 497 Recommendation n 496 538 SMEG port EEren ARE SURE Bard SA KO 497 MISCOSID sees oie ode Ch ee soe AE DE 496 497 538 Onboard Diagnostic System 0 491 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 255 Opetaune Precautions ua Er n Ry E SUR 491 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors 95 Ad AE EE sane eis fees eee ees 380 Overdrive OFF SWitch 5 ina E ERF RIAM 380 Overiedd ORSOIG n kas RD bes ME RR e 4 255 N INDEX 581 Overheating ENGINE 222229945 2455 eni 295 464 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 563 Pant Gale os ay eb bee heehee ae aes 519 Lanes TI uua ves eA ERES OR OAAR GED ees 22 Park Sense System Reat ua esce qure n on 243 Parks Bike auum acres s ews RR IS e608 390 Passie LCM oos onse d c dd ee OER edere 203 Pedals Ad uskbl wo hewew tresse PREIE ees 215 els gb ohne 4 OR ELE EERS os Oe eee 81 Placard Tire and Loading Information 408 Power Deck Lid R
8. 372 STARTING AND OPERATING ee vehicle speed Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level SPORT If Equipped This mode alters the transmission s automatic shift schedule for sportier driving Upshift speeds are in creased to make full use of available engine power To switch between DRIVE and SPORT modes tap the shift lever rearward SPORT mode is only accessible from DRIVE LOW If Equipped This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range the trans mission will downshift for increased engine braking To switch between DRIVE and LOW modes tap the shift lever rearward LOW mode is only accessible from DRIVE Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission may operate only in certain gears or may not shift at all Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall In some situations the transmission may not re engage if the engine is turned off and restarted The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions and indicate what actions may be necessary In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset
9. 74 75 Late Vigne 4 43 44 40 46 en bs oe AE RAS 2 4 44 Latehee w 4 os pees ee eas Aas ee eee 85 als ee x2 2 OER EE HE ENS EN OG 196 Lead Free Gasoline SS eese 435 Leaks Fluid x23 654 93b 4 3 3 wee ek Purus wt 85 IB ES META si CETT CRTTTTETTTTETTTCTTTT 419 Le BE DUIS suc oce oo cease ce oes RES EE 85 533 Er m 4a SR eet oie te ee es 85 198 Adds creed ves EE ene 63 69 83 290 P cun ERR bebe hoa ee owe eos oH 291 ie Fo AAR AAR ON VERUS P One E 291 Automatic Headlights sers sd ER AR PRE 198 Brake Assist Warning ee se se se ee 401 Brake WS i43 04409445 EER AS 292 Bulb Replacement 244445449 5444 6 dus 033 534 tie RUNIUNG nb out h es AREA HEEL 201 Dimmer Switch Headlight 202 203 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 401 Exterior iese ce heeded hee ee ae es 85 578 INDEX M FOS std DEERE hi eee pat idR E RE 201 286 PASSING cs 44 hie e DE EDE BELY 4 8 Rd RE 203 Hazard Warning Flasher 464 nnb 204 254 Headin ul a sos Re eq pad x B des 198 Seat Belt Kemind r uus duis Sandee oe rs 294 Headin Yon oe heen OD RED RE DE 198 535 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 29 Headlights On Reminder sau dace e EE 201 v aad M CP m 533 534 Headlights On With Wipers 199 210 Service Engine Soon aia i a aco aseo date EE OPEENS N As 203 Malfunction Indicator 289 High B am Indicator iu eadem rera He DREK 286 OMADES 6 64002 RAAR OE KAREE ees 199 H
10. DRIVER OVERRIDE will display in the EVIC UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 e The system will not be controlling the distance be tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal Driver Override 032443099 Driver Override 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Cancel The system will disable ACC without erasing the memory if You softly tap the brake pedal Adaptive You depress the brake pedal Cruise Control You press the CANCEL switch Cancelled An Anti Lock Brake System ABS event occurs 56789 mi If the transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys Ee tem ESC TCS activates Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled NOTE If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC TCS off TO Tum od l The system will turn off and erase the set speed in ESC will automatically be re engaged memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button e You turn OFF the ignition N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 To Resume Speed Press the RES button and release Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed NOTE You can resume ACC from a minimum of 20 mph 32 km h WARNING The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailin
11. Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound command form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound com mand form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Phone works best when you talk in a normal conver sational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natura
12. Remove from Favs 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Touch the next to appropriate Favorite that is to be altered 68 ad FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Yb 2 Phenebook Fa j j e Voicemail Edit Number Reset to Default We Pepe Roni Ma Budd y s Pizza C e The Options pop up will appear and you can choose between Editing the number or resetting the number to default Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available and supported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service pro vider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone e Redial e Dial by touching in the number e Voice Commands Dial by Saying a Name Call by Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back e Favorite Phonebook N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 e Mobile Phonebook Call By Saying A Phonebook Name e Recent Call Log e Press the button to begin e SMS Message Viewer e After the Listening prompt and the following beep NOTE All of the above operations except Redial can be A ee ae done with 1 call or less active e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated 3
13. Trunk Emergency Release As a security measure a trunk internal emergency release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow in the dark handle attached to the trunk latching mecha nism Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and 2 all passengers Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupant 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts th
14. e Subscription Information New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online NOTE SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch User s Manual NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 HARMAN KARDON Logic7 HIGH PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon audio system with GreenEdge technology that offers superior sound quality higher Sound Pressure Levels SPL and reduced energy consumption The new system utilizes proprietary amplifier and speaker technologie
15. e The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph 24 km h and the system automatically disengages itself e The distance setting is changed e The system disengages Refer to the information on ACC Activation The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited how ever the driver can always apply the brakes manually if necessary NOTE The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance If this occurs a visual alert BRAKE will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee capacity When this occurs you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead NE 83 F BRAKE e Brake Alert 032433102 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer The information it displays depends on ACC system status Press and release the UP or DOWN button until ACC or Cruise is highlighted in the EVIC Status of the ACC or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line Press and release the SELECT right arrow button to display the following information Adaptive
16. headlights will turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or a 2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE
17. soft key you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use e Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uc
18. when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Drivers must be careful when backing up even WARNING Continued e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued system it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 PARKVIEW
19. 68 uf FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Vp 72 No phone connected i Would you like to pair a phone j 030536949 3 Select Yes to begin the pairing process Then search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e f No is selected touch the Settings soft key from the Uconnect Phone main screen 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Touch the Add Device soft key e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e See Step 4 to complete the process 4 Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting 68 t FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Ww 72 Bluetooth pairing in progress Please wait 5 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Pair Additional Mobile Phones e Touch the More soft key to begin e Touch the Settings soft key Booi poling es e Next touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Add Device soft key Make this p
20. If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping loaded it should have its own brakes and they distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven brakes when you need them and could have an pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har collision ness and connector Continued NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations O Oo o O OTO Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn O 057003766 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground STARTING AND OPERATING 459 od he f
21. NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors On 1st Press all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all the doors or use the RKE transmitter e Memory Linked to FOB Touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft key to change this display This feature provides automatic driver seat po sitioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle driver 1 and driver 2 last mode settings and presets To make your selection touch the Memory Linked to FOB soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 e Passive Entry Keyless Enter N Go Touch the Passive Entry soft k
22. engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Eise PPP 94 O Inside Day Night Mirror 94 o Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 94 ELO utside Mimas sies de yh UR RE ee ERRORS 95 XO Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 96 o Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped is ede mans 96 O Outside Mirrors Approach Light If PUPP asses mis oe ae Aa hae d EE on 96 o Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped 96 O Power MITOS ace 20 se add Bu Oe EO Ow RE 27 D Heated Mirrors If Equipped 98 O Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 98 O Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of DUM UL DP seen DO EE 98 ll Blind Spot Monitoring If Equipped 99 E foni Cross Fali soas x a Eos DNS bose as 104 EL Modes OF Operation sies vd RR RE xd oe 106 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Bl Uconnect Phone 4 3 0000 eee 107 O Uconnec Touch 4 3 iussu 486 ico eeu sd 107 Fi SOLO MD 110 O Phone Call Features 116 O Uconnect Phone Features 121 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 125 O Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone is ei one See nya 125 O General Information 129
23. r t TT DODE an12 GHARGER OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obliga tion upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured Copyright 2011 Chrysler Group LLC dy m O
24. 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M To attach a child restraint tether strap 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the for the strap between the anchor and the child seat seat where you are placing the child restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the 2226109 child Use only the anchor positions directly behind
25. 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status touch and release the OFF Sound Only or Sounds and Display button Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for sys tem function and operating information e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse When this feature is selected the outside sideview mir rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE VERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Blind Spot Alert When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 audible alert when the turn signal is on When Of
26. 4 3 Press the CLIMATE hard key located next to the Uconnect Touch display to enter the climate control screen a Press the Driver or Pass seat soft key lo cated on the Uconnect Touch display once to select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF Front Heated Seat Operations Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch 8 4 and 8 4 Nav Press the Controls soft key located on the Uconnect Touch display Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level heating Press the soft key a second time to select LO level heating Press the soft key a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HI level If the HlI level setting is selected the N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 system will automatically switch to LO level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the display will change from HI to LO indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automati cally after a maximum of 45 minutes Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote
27. Bl Uconnect Phone 8 4 8 4N 130 O Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 NAV 130 ELODGIQUOD 24450540480 hobs be eH KRONE 133 O Phone Call Features 044 144 O Uconnect Phone Features 149 O Advanced Phone Connectivity 153 O Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect PhOfle v 46 55 8 2799 3 uer BERE ais 154 O General Information LL 163 M Voice Command Ln 164 O Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 NAV 164 DB Uconnect Voice Commands 166 O Voice d MATE AS TERE OE TE es 167 NM AE ets ERTS ee 178 O Power Seats If Equipped 178 O Power Lumbar If Equipped 181 o Heated Seats If Equipped 181 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 O Ventilated Seats If Equipped 184 o Automatic Headlights If Equipped 198 o Manual Seats If Equipped 186 o Headlights On With Wipers Available With Oo Head Restraints 2444 sae SE ob ER N eons 188 Ao AS ea EE OE anata EP di LH Polde Rear Seat 2 25 09292 492 92 92 93 4 os 190 es va toD ll Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 192 a EE AE ema O Programming The Memory Feature 193 ede enn IN EE 201 spas sere ficia Seyless 193 E Tiehts On Reminder 4222429 xem hs 201 o Memory Position Recall Ls 194 uw m E is 4 Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With ELTUEBEBODOI Lever seris eeu qu KERR ME 20
28. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision 278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the butt
29. L E S 8 548 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 64 000 miles 104 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing five speed transmission only Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary L1 Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing All Wheel Drive AWD C C C C O L L L L Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 549 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 54 Months Maintenance schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occu
30. P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure T Met df 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and e lemporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo Temperature Grades rary emergency use only Temporary high pressure 404 STARTING AND OPERATING M compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded ample T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or S Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias
31. Panel for further information N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 Fog Lights If Eduipped The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The Daytime Running Lights will turn On the first time the vehicle is shifted out of PARK and remain On unless the Parking Brake is applied Upon returning to the PARK position the DRLs will turn Off DRLs will turn Off when the ignition is switched OFF NOTE The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE O To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls
32. SABIC Front and Side Impact Sensors Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB may e No objects should be placed over or near the air provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant bag on the instrument panel because oy such during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a As label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only whe
33. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure
34. Tether Strap Mounting the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether Cover A Tether Strap Hook strap 3 Attaching Strap B Tether Anchor N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may re
35. To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top If you are unable to open the fuel filler door use the fuel off the fuel tank after filling filler door emergency release 1 Open the trunk 446 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 Remove the access cover located on the left side inner 3 Pull the release cable trim panel Release Cable Access Cover ee STARTING AND OPERATING 447 VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is t
36. given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound com mand form voice command Search for John Smith or you can break the compound command form into two voice commands Search Contact and when asked John Smith Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conver sational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Natural Speech Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Language Voice Recognition VR engine 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Voice Comman
37. o MMT In Gasoline 004 438 O Cruising Range 442 O Materials Added To Fuel 438 O Replacement Parts esses 443 O Fuel System Cautions 438 O Maintenance lees 443 D Carbon Monoxide Warnings 79 Maading Fuel e 443 O Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release 445 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 W Vehicle Loading ene 447 O Trailer Towing Weights E Vehicle Certification Label amp 22e 447 ME ii ET n 4 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 447 O Trailer And Tongue Weight 453 O Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 447 E Towins Requirements isi is ed ae mars 455 El verle dle uod Sacs OBP EA Pa ED A ORE 448 a ADS Doe tii aoe ata a ema ames Sacks 39 IIT T EE PE la Trailer Towing 2 0 0 ke ee 449 3 Two Wheel Drive And All Wheel Drive BG Common Towing Definitions 449 O Trailer Hitch Classification 452 360 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued e Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key Automatic Transmission fob from the ignition and lock your
38. tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any trans mission only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517 Fluid Level Check CAUTION Continued Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted e The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating If you notice fluid loss or transmission malfunction have conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe CAUTION damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu fluid level accurately facturer s recommended fluid may cau
39. Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation a The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the ee Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF Synchronizing ESC If the power supply is interrupted battery 5 disconnected or discharged the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESC and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible STARTING AND OPERATING 403 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H Tire Markings e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter
40. Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Off Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected the display will read Adaptive Cruise Control Ready N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 ACC SET When ACC is set the set speed will display The set speed will continue to display in place of the odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set NE 83 F VWMUZ The Light The Afters He Lives ACC 55 mph Rs 032433431 Example Only The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC activity occurs which may include any of the following Set Speed Change Distance Setting Change System Cancel Driver Override System Off ACC Proximity Warning ACC Unavailable Warning The EVIC will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Display Warnings And Maintenance Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle Warning The ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance This most often occurs at times of poor visibility such as in snow or heavy rain The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions such as mud dirt or ice In these cases the EVIC will display Clean Radar Sensor In F
41. O In Canada N Publication Order Forms 558 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O Traction Grades ws x pe emp e tuns TT pti 565 ay Grade gaa ac odes hanes Oh ek DES 565 oO Treadwear eet be eae Oe PRS OES HESS EEO 565 O Tene ca Eure Grades sins oe re 566 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 559 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in y
42. ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Steering Directed Lights Touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel To make your selection touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Flash Headlights With Lock Touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Doors amp Locks e Auto Unlock On Exit Touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key to change this display When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Flash Lights With Lock Touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the door
43. OR COLD 2 um CONDITIONS N C 6464 GOD COLD DRY CONDITIONS G Set the Mode control to Mix or Defrost Sg set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear Set the Mode control to Floor 4 If it s sunny you may want more upper air In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 74 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Mix amp amp or Defrost LS as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort DagesERag STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS W Starting Procedures uus emos odin Heed eos 360 W Automatic Transmission O Automatic Transmission i44 4398 22 cas 360 H Key Ignition Park Interlock HKevless Enter N GO 4 seas eee Ss p OE bo os 361 oO Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System O Normal Skatte 2390 Ke eek eee ee eens 361 O Eight 5peed Automatic Transmission 3 6L uius Cold Weather ENGNG PT Below 20 F Or 29 C cue wexebrk4cye s 363 O Standard Shifter uas wat sey xd daa ux O If Engine Fails To Start o cesse meo 363 O Optional Shifter With AutoStick BL ATIS AOE sos see AREER ER 364 EGE KANOS PTT Mi Engine Block Heater If Equipped 364 D Five Speed Automatic Transmission 5 7L Eo I soos EPOS SEER sun wae BIS ARE DR 2 356 STARTING AND OPERATING M El Gat RINGES ee 54 chen Genoese ee DRS
44. Phone or Audio Device than the Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device currently connected device e Touch the Settings soft key e The options pop up will be displayed e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Delete Device soft key e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite Touch the Settings soft key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name The options pop up will be displayed Touch the Make Favorite soft key you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A
45. Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice command period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page before speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in your favorites phonebook wh
46. Surfaces Driving On a s esc RR ERG 385 ARE PSI PN CR RR RS T T TT es ee ha ORE OT 199 Snow Chains Tire Chains LL 421 Snow Tires uuu voce cie n Ree eee dor c d 3 423 Sound System TICRO ARE EE N IE NS 309 pere Me 2 eeteese eens epee MAR ES 416 417 466 ses WSs KAR nig hae Deve hA uh eho ee a N 959 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 20 00005 435 939 geo eee oe TER ene FOR oe ee eee 539 Speed Control Cruise Control 217 220 OPELUCE a 212 94 126 9 3 272 9 8 9 9 mt Po prit edd a s 290 POL Mode s sa s etos AUR ORI eee di 383 tig M 62g Ges tees ee ne eee FEIT a Soe 25 360 Automatic Transmission 360 Cold Weather i e a REY REO 4 363 Fog ne fals to DH 5 ELE ER oe s 363 cunc t 29 Diath aiid Ope sk oe eh HAD HEDE 360 tarune died UIES 44845 tee BE BED BARE ds 360 Steering Column Controls oou quio BR Pom dide aha 202 Coll LOCK uua dux uus n vv e bx ds 211 loc rr 389 Tul Comin ss sake HAAR SEER 211212 Wheel Heated esee 213 Wheel Tib uos saute DER OUER 211212 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 340 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System dong 41444764 6456 os eee OE as Pea 340 ucc Eie een vasa teases poe EE 274 533 Storage Vehicle 5 a ERG chee REEN RR d 353 533 DIETSE YOUR Velde s eesi REED ee eae we aaa ge 999 DUICK Heel oraa rA REA S Gad VEO SEXO 479 DUM ROO 2 er Xue 44055556245 2558 oha ode 263 Sunglasses S Orag 64 3 ok Shee eee RS T RES 254 Sunroof Maintena
47. Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the
48. Uconnect voice command butte Commands available in AM FM Satellile mode Audio will change to the AM or FM frequency or Satellite Channel stored in preset 5 Audio will change to the next Satellite Rock Station on the steering wheel Commands only available Audio will change to BO s on 8 in Satellite made salellite station Audio will change ta Salellite Charinel amp 030803043 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE 3 You can replace 8 with any other satellite station 1 You can replace 950 AM with any other AM or FM named received by the radio frequency such as 98 7 FM 4 You can replace rock with any of the satellite music 2 You can replace 80 s on 8 with any other satellite types station name received by the radio 5 Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Uconnect Hands Free Music Control These Commands Gan be spoken when playing mesit from your 3b cand USE dewre Gb or iPod after pushing the Uconnect voice command button qe VR on the steering wheel Radio will play the album Ragtime Favorites Radio will play the Radio will play the Audio Book Dr Ramo will pay Podcast Weekly Auta Podrast Radio will play Radio will play thre Radio will play he Artist Scott Song Maple Leaf ede al the Playlist Par
49. Unlock is set to ON when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start After pressing the Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start soft key the following settings will be available e Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Auto On Driver Heated Ventilated Seat amp Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start If Equipped When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C When tempera tures are above 80 F 26 7 C the driver vented seat will turn on To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Engine Off Options After pressing the Engine Off Options soft key the fol lowing settings will be available NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 e Easy Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
50. VEHICLE M Send Messages Using Voice Commands GE FM917 10 10 NW 54 ou e Press the button Messaging gt New Message eo BEN e After the Listening prompt and the following beep TE say Send message to John Smith mobile vr EER 3 Call me e After the system prompts you for what message you 4 Need directions want to send say the message you wish to send or say List There are 18 preset messages 5 I ll be there in XX minutes While the list of defined messages are being read you can interrupt the system by pressing the button and saying the message you want to send After the system confirms that you want to send your message to John Smith your message will be sent N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE List of Preset Messages 1 Yes 2 No 3 Okay 4 I can t talk right now 5 Call me 6 TI call you later 7 l m on my way 8 Thanks 9 TII be late 10 I will be number minutes late 11 See you in number minutes 12 Stuck in traffic Io 14 15 16 17 18 Start without me Where are you Are you there yet I need directions I m lost See you later Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone OFF ON Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After swit
51. Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the EVIC displauy It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE e You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK e The highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC whenever the Electronic Range Select ERS feature is active Use the selector on the shift lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operating for further information 8 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
52. WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 412 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in tire over heating and failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting areas are affected by improper tire pressure in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 413 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the ti
53. YOUR VEHICLE Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light 030434976 Illuminated Vanity Mirror Slide On Rod And Extender Features Of Sun Visor To use the Slide On Rod feature of the sun visor rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window grabbing the sun visor with your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 desired position To use the extender feature of the sun BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED visor grab the extender which is located at the rear of the The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar visor and pull rearward based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that enter the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle 030440176 Slide On Rod Feature l l l l l l i l I i Re
54. and fuel system components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 437 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e change the engine oil and oil fil
55. and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 1 License Lamp Bulb 2 Socket 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install the screws 538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUID CAPACITIES 5 6 Liters 5 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 6 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 10 Quarts 5 Liters Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System MOPAR 14 5 Quarts 13 9 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 5 7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System MOPAR 15 Quarts 14 3 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 3 6L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to the eng
56. change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 543 referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation At Each Stop For Fuel e Check the engine oil level Refer to Maintenance Procedures Engine Oil in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once A Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and power steering and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 544 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 16 000 Mil
57. closer This setting provides less reaction time than the Far setting which allows for a more dynamic driving experience Changing the FCW status to Off prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you NOTE e In the Off setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the Uconnect Touch display e The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down e FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over head objects ground reflections objects not in the path of the car stationary objects that are far away oncom ing traffic or leading vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed e FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the un available screens FCW Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions FCW will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating FCW again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 Service FCW Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have
58. collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro priate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent collisions The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 398 STARTING AND OPERATING ee ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC When ever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving conditions The ESC should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows The ESC Off switch is located on the switch bank in the center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will illu minate To turn the ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off switch and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will turn off NOTE e
59. damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523 Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipp
60. doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through Uconnect Touch To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Unlatch The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
61. engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the gualified service person nel special tools and eguipment to perform all service Operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Id MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES CAUTION Continued The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids vehicle that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance Besides those maintenance items specified in the
62. engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal To start the engine the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL Press and hold the brake pedal while press ing the ENGINE START STOP button once The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle If the vehicle fails to start the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting press the button again To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button 1 Place the shift lever in PARK then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button 362 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 2 The ignition switch will return to the OFF position 3 If the shift lever is not in PARK the ENGINE START STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph 8 km h before the engine will shut off The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed once the EVIC if equipped will display a Vehicle Not In Park message and the engine will remain running Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position or it could roll NOTE If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN engine not running position and the transmission is in PARK the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes o
63. fastener securing the jack WARNING e A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided e Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas Jack Fastener 6 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly N WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 469 WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking And Changing A Tire WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher e Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher help prevent personal injury or damage to your l hicle 3 Set the parking brake EE EN e Always park on a firm level surface as far from 4 Place the shift lever into PARK the edge of the roadway as possible before raising 5 Turn OFF t
64. fixed intervals Do not tse chemical flushes in these maintenance schedule there are other components which components as the chemicals can damage your may require servicing or replacement in the future engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495 Engine Oil Checking Oil Level 3 6L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines CAUTION Overfillin
65. frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Tum your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP if equipped or Traction Control System TCS if equipped before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for
66. func tions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode e Distance To Empty DTE e Miles Per Gallon MPG UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 NE 156789mi 102 4 back Fuel Economy AVG 18 gt Reset DTE 234 Instant MPG 0 15 ME AA WIE 10111 041063338 Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset There is an ECO icon in the lower portion of the EVIC display This icon will appear whenever the Multi Displacement System MDS if equipped allows the engine to operate on four cylinders or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DIE cannot be reset through the SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style
67. glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement 534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exterior Bulb Number Low Beam Headlamp Standard Halogen H11 Low Beam Headlamp High Intensity Discharge ID i edema des ug E pad aded s D3S Serviced at Authorized Dealer High Beam Headlamp gt sis ne DIS ae EE arn iode 9005 Front Park Turn Lamp aues dor PER swi 3157A Front Fog Lamp If Equipped PSX24W Front ide Marker sea at s ase ED ade HAN Gee EER 168 Rear Tail Lamp LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Keats top bui Laip sa ss soel aah eee ee RE LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear ide Marker oaa tuU Ed RE 168 backup Lamp oo oo ace DERDE HS 9157 Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer LiGERSS Er eh de ee ee ee ew RE 168 BULB REPLACEMENT Front Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp And Side Marker Lamp Models With Halogen Headlamps 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535 CAUTION this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to Do not touch the new b
68. ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and 394 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end WARNING Continued of the stop e e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys These are all normal characteristics of ABS ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase WARNING braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip tires or the traction afforded ment that may be susceptible to interference The ABS cannot prevent collisions including caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others bility Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may
69. ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in the PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 CAUTION e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated e Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not
70. in at the heavier loads e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued 456 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued WARNING Continued 2 GTW 3 GAWR e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic Towing Requirements Tires transmission in PARK Always block or chock RE AE N Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact GCWR must not be exceeded spare tire Total weight must be distributed between the tow Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe vehicle and the trailer such that the following four and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to ratings are not exceeded Tires General Information in Starting and Oper 1 Max loading as
71. is active Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time 262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Troubleshooting Tips WARNING If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal trans ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door to complete the training for a Rolling Code opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes e Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ten e Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without If you have any problems or require assistance please these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for www HomeLink com for information or assistance safety informat
72. is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to impacts that require air bag occupant protection WARNING your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag main free from any obstructions The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects enhanced protection and works together with the Driver between you and the side air bags the perfor Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact mance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Knee Impact Bolster The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the Continued front passenger and position the front occupant for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provi
73. lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 395 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that include Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS and the Electronic Stability Control ESC All four of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions Also your vehicle is equipped with Hill Start Assist HSA Ready Alert Braking and Rain Brake Support Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydr
74. lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation or all of the following may occur continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause EE plea abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and 5 LES front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed If you are involved in another collision the air you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretension
75. may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pres sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message is displayed Vehicles With Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the 434 STARTING AND OPERATING ee EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing or in a different color 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the pressure value displayed will be updated and stop flashing or return to its or
76. mobile phone directly 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect Phone Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconn
77. move out of PARK REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the trans mission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle 378 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recre ational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first second and third gears direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi
78. moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door air bags If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need could cause serious injury including death Air Assistance Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Side air bags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s sig
79. need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration ei For states that reguire an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON posit
80. off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion 426 STARTING AND OPERATING ee For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system Operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as dam
81. only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone Button is used to get mel recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will into the phone mode and make calls show hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command Button is i VR only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call The butto
82. open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury 276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Door Storage Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped with 60 40 The door panels contain storage areas Split Folding Rear Seat The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly flat extension of the load floor When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into Front Door Trim Storage position If the seatback is not securely locked into 035235231 position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injuty Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277 WARNING Continued WARNING e The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision
83. open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature NOTE e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxi mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature e The Ignition Off time is programmable using the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are three 12 Volt 13 Amps electrical power outlets on this vehicle The power outlets are protected by a fuse N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267 Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power outlets for use to ensure proper operation NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element
84. posts are viewed by standing WARNING on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery mad 060836876 1 Remote Positive Post 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission 2 Remote Negative Post into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK Remote Battery Posts 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park CAUTION the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the could establish a ground connection and personal remote positive post of the discharged vehicle injury could result
85. properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the se
86. rear end collision When the system determines that a rear end collision is probable a warning message both audible and visual will be displayed on the EVIC When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable the warning message will be deactivated UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 WARNING Forward Collision Warning FCW is not intended to avoid a collision on its own The driver has the NW Ba F BRAKE responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death Changing FCW Status The FCW feature can be set to far set to near or turned off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument FCW Message Panel for further information The FCW Status Off Near NOTE The minimum speed for FCW activation is or Far will be displayed in the Uconnect Touch display 10 mph 16 km h 032433107 The default status of FCW is the Far setting this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Changing the FCW status to the Near setting allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are much
87. soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Hill Start Assist If Equipped When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Lights After pressing the Lights soft key the following settings will be available e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Illumination On Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Headlights With Wipers If Equipped When this feat
88. speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates 424 STARTING AND OPERATING These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed SSS Ec gt 055703771 Tire Rotation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended
89. start the driver s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently You can choose from HI LO or OFF heat settings Amber indica tor lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI one for LO and none for OFF a NOTE e Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes Press the switch once to select HI level heating Press the switch a second time to select LO level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF e The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate When the Hl level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal Hl level If the HlI level setting is selected the 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M system will automatically switch to LO level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs change
90. system from responding to all RKE transmit ter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021341332 Key Fob With RKE Transmitter To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry refer to Keyless Enter N Go under Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Flash Lights With Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the
91. system is connecting e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE For devices which are not made a favorite the device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired Audio Devices N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or e Touch the soft key located to the right of the device Audio Device name Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and or Audio Device within range If you would need to choose a particular e Touch the Disconnect Device soft key phone or Audio Device follow these steps e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen 3 Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device e The options pop up will be displayed Touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Settings soft key Touch to select the particular Phone or the Paired S Audio Sources soft key and then an Audio Device Jouets Sobre MOD piter e Touch the soft key located to the right of the device name for a different
92. the jack screw clockwise to firmly 060641515 6 engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange Front Jacking Location 472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and tire 7 Mount the spare tire CAUTION Rear Jacking Location Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem 5 Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the and install the spare tire spare tire is mounted incorrectly WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 473 e Refer to Compact Spare Tire and to Limited Use Spare under Tires General Information in Start ing and Operating for additional warnings cautions and information about the spare tire its use and operation 8 Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack 99 060633619 do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle Mounting Spare Tire has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may NOTE result in personal injury e For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare 9 Lower the vehicle to th
93. the parking lights or headlights on rotating the left The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of located on the left side of the instrument panel the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders if equipped Instrument Panel Dimmer UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 Ambient Light Control Dome Light Position Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the increase or decrease the brightness of the door handle second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights and ambient light located in the overhead console lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this pe position Interior Light Defeat OFF 3 Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer EVIC if equipped and radio when the park ing lights or headlights are on Door Handle Ambient Light Dimmer 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or ACC position The lever is located on the left side of the steering column D31
94. the system checked by an authorized dealer ACG FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 56789 mi 032433104 ACC FCW Unavailable Warning PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will retain the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON RUN position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orienta tion of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Disp
95. tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode refer to AutoStick in this section to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped the transmission will remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will con tinue to operate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK 3 Turn the engine OFF 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmi
96. to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 NOTE In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re engage after en gine shutdown perform this procedure only in a desired location preferably at your authorized dealer 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift the transmission into PARK if possible 3 Turn the engine OFF 4 Wait approximately 30 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Five Speed Automatic Transmission 5 7L Engine The shift lever position display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position refer to Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position 374 STARTING AND OPERATING The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefo
97. to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest could increase the risk of injury in accidents Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
98. transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 021337430 3 Remove the battery by turning the back cover over battery facing downward and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar then replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on the battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB
99. turn signal is left on and Lights On if driver leaves the vehicle e Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state Examples of this message type are Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar and Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start e Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Ex amples of this message type are Memory System Un available Not in Park and Automatic High Beams On The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right amber telltales in the middle and red telltales on the left EVIC White Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell tales These telltales include e Shift Lever Status The shift lever status PR N D L 6 5 4 3 2 1 are dis played indicating the shift lever position Telltales 6 5 4 3 2 1 indicate the Electronic Range Select ERS feature has been engaged and the gear selected is dis played For further information on ERS refer to Starting And Operating e Electronic Speed Control ON This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Veh
100. vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the KA Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required You may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi ee tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a s
101. vehicle The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children before shifting into any driving gear CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Continued Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 CAUTION Continued e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Keyless Enter N Go This feature allows the driver to oper ate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment Normal Starting Using The ENGINE START STOP Button NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
102. whan nol dams phone call entrar steering wheel alier pushing the Uncenert vos command bu DEVR Garmin Guided Dialog Ter iting festauiant tral are near to you current location Garmin prompt wil he Where Am Garmin will choose played asking if sareei will 6n Altamata route Init does not include uieplayed hoe rend Lum Imre Gurrerit aviation Rome Navination Route will not be i canceled will tra canceled 030563042 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE 2 You can say Find Nearest then Restaurant Fuel 1 You can also say Find City Find Favorite Find Transit Lodging Shopping Bank Entertain Play by Category Find Play by Name Find Recently ment Recreation Attractions Community Found Where to or Go Home Auto Services Hospitals Parking Airport Po lice Stations Fire Stations or Auto Dealers N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 Uconnect Hands Free Calling Universal amp Connect Commands The commands can be spoken from any screen after pushing the Uconnect Phone button te on he steering wheel Cancels listening ta your voice Settings screen Bluetooth paired will be shown audio devices will Connection be shawn process will be completed with touch screen tommand Bluetooth Phone List of connected List of paired p
103. when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to Always make sure that floor mats are properly feel the air directed against the windshield See your attached to the floor mat fasteners authorized dealer for service if your defroster is Never place or install floor mats or other floor inoperable coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats
104. with a smaller load index or Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet capacity other than what was originally equipped SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load Proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain index could result in tire overloading and failure manufacturer Install tire chains only on P215 65R17 You could lose control and have a collision using standard chains on P225 60R18 and P235 55R18 Continued 422 STARTING AND OPERATING ee using model 0143 tirechaindealer com and on P235 55R19 using model Z 575 scc chain com NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 12 mile 0 8 km Continued CAUTION Continued Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use on rear wheels only Do not drive for prolonged pe
105. your vehicle and be sure to unable to view every obstacle or object in your check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob drive path structions or blind spots before backing up You are To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be responsible for the safety of your surroundings and driven slowly when using Park View to be able to must continue to pay attention while backing up stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 Turning ParkView On Or Off With Touch Screen Radio 1 Turn the Radio on 2 Press the More soft key 3 Press the Settings soft key 4 Press the Safety amp Driving Assistance soft key 5 Press the check box soft key next to Parkview Backup Camera to enable disable 033333450 OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink and power sunroof switches may also be included if equipped Overhead Console 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Map Reading Lights To turn the lights off press th
106. 0 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse 10 MEN Pink 10 Amp Fuel Door Diagnostic Red Port 2 23 24 15 Amp Radio Screen 12 20 Amp Cigar Lighters In Blue Yellow strument Panel amp 25 10 Amp Tire Pressure Monitor Power Outlet Con Red d 26 j Fue Spare I Lane IT ep oy Rone Pane Seats Natural 15 Amp HVAC Module Blue Cluster HVAC Blower 25 Amp Amplifier Natural 15 Amp Ignition Switch Blue Wireless Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Red Module Clock Red Spot Camera Red Blue Mirror Compass Yellow Fuse Spare Fuse Spare 20 Amp Front Heated Seats Yellow 1 20 Amp Power Outlet Inside Yellow Arm Rest Fue Spae Fue Spae 25 Amp Rear Heated Seats Natural Steering Wheel Kama Kama 46 10 Amp Adaptive Cruise 5 Amp Radio Red Control Blue 47 10 Amp Adaptive Front Red _ Lighting ENEN NN EE 9 EE 532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 2 10 Amp Heated Cupholders 6 Fuse Spare Red Rear Heated Seat ee Fuse Spare a 64 25 Amp Rear Windows Red Car Temperature Sen KJ 10 Amp Airbag Module sor Red Fase Spare gg F
107. 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper Jump Starting Procedure cable to the positive post of the booster battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion 478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle If
108. 2 Memory Seat Only 324 ein nmi ees dc 195 TGR ies pede GAP og eee oars XR 202 N To Open And Close The Hood 196 O Lane Change Assist 04 203 NEL MEET OR eee EE EET 198 HIDsh Low Beam Switch 9545 53 24404 43 203 liede El a bee cone EDE qe 198 Pigs OP NOR TO EE ET EST 203 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie O Front Map Reading Lights 204 Mi Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped 213 ELS IDnbIen kie bs ease ke coe qe deri oe Pe ES 205 W Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 215 ELIRISDIOR Lille sv an ROKER ERROR neni 205 W Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 217 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 208 ETO elle to bed Hee chee a Yr a e 218 O Intermittent Wiper System 208 o To Set A Desired Speed sd Aa EE RASEND 218 EL Wiper Operation oo ves ae ERA hae a3 RIDE 208 ci 16 Deaelisate nee aat bead ER RE E eke 4 218 o Windshield Washers SE SE see 209 Hi lo Resume Speed aues Sues WE comer aa 219 A Mist Peai uso 9 54 be RE Rd d ede e 209 o To Vary The Speed Setting 219 o Headlights On With Wipers Available With o To Accelerate For Passing 219 Automatic Headlights Only 210 lll Adaptive Cruise Control ACC O Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 210 IP EQUIDDed cud ence added dh PER HI ES 220 N Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 211 D Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation 222 E
109. 351 PO bern MIPS fetes pese d AREA REED eo 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 5 DABT ARTS 1 Air Outlet 7 ESC Off Switch 13 Engine Start Stop Button 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Uconnect Touch System Hard Controls 14 Trunk Release Button 3 Hazard Switch 9 SD Memory Card Slot 15 Dimmer Controls 4 Uconnect Touch System 10 Power Outlet 16 Hood Release 5 Climate Control Hard Controls 11 CD DVD Slot 17 Headlight Switch 6 Glove Compartment 12 Storage Compartment 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040340805 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 040340806 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 2 AWD All Wheel Drive Indicator If Equipped The AWD indicator will illuminate when All Wheel Drive AWD is activated 3 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park p d lights or headlights are turned on 4 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to t
110. 4486 n DER HEER en 201 Reminder Seat Belt 4 5 46 zs oo ea Sk Rma 52 Remote Control DUANE Oy iiri a oe g a ok Ba R ED ae ere 25 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 340 Remote Starling Systemi s lt 4 4 045 94 4 pi Roe SE Ss 25 Remote Trunk Release llle 39 Replacement PUDS 4s 244 4 4 548 LE RE ED 533 Replacement Keys trinscimede shee ees ee 16 Replacement Pans au se EE DEAR DE EE RD tous 493 Replacement Ties onse or 96 43424 mens esa 420 Reporting Safety Detects ia ass e Hd HERE KERR 562 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 287 304 Restraint Head 2424 22545 28 484 RR RES ee SR 188 Restraints Child anu Rx teen eae ER E 70 Restaints Occupant sies RES RERR HER ees aus 41 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 0 479 Rotation Tires 446 oa eae OREO RH ON YORE aea 423 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 4 25 see OP am amp 5 83 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 85 Safety Defects Reporting sissies ER Re 562 Safety Information Tire 403 Dalely JIGS oek ein AR PRO cone tes aoe neg eae 82 Safety Exhaust GaS sus ois GOs HER HERE RR SE 82 Schedule Maintenance SS 542 Seat Belt Maintenance iss ed 444540562645 524 Dealt belt Reminder sce sons bo HEER kee ti 52 N INDEX 583 Seat Belts s ods oe ewe Gee mS EE oes 41 43 83 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 48 And Pregnant Women ss dee EER BRA Os 53 Child Restraint
111. 540 Blake BIB oa re dd acq up arant d SOR DEd dos d 514 ala Loc ABS sugiere ETE Gea rb n 393 Hunt ne0k so bee RES trinii 514 540 Master Cynder sesia EER aay osu pos HR DR 514 Eet kie seee 3394 oboe eee RR BE Ed Worn LAGE s cades ae neg HR cages ween Broke Parke 22445 sani evs oaee Ge vee PRX Brake Transmission Interlock Drakes ist E DERE oe Hie DEEG AO oe Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 570 INDEX aaa ees qs NN Brightness Interior Lights xau RO EED EE ES 206 Bulb Keplacement oie 4c Bk SERE a eas 533 934 Bulbs Ligne os ss tener dus ose a AR RE 85 533 Camera Real xxx quies S ovum eh ee eee eae ee 251 Capacities Fluid osse se ey RS HADES EE Re 538 Caps Filler CUNENCWIC sies 2665 OR OER RR te Ge 496 497 Radiator Coolant Pressure 5H Rr oso eee cath ewe to ke Monee ee DE 519 Carbon Monoxide Warning 82 439 Cargo Vehicle Loading issie AE 8442524545 447 Celular PRONG vice oes e 2 8 sass ae BR AR 342 Certiiication Label cis 223 34 Rog a ees 447 Chains Tire 2 ee ee 421 Changing A Plat Tire soe v Sob IA KEER HEAD es 465 Charl Tie SINS sce e bea Rea HORE ER SE RES 404 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 289 491 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 82 Checks ale nsec aches Gaeta Hons hes eo s 82 Child Restraint 222044000048 aa Ha 70 72 73 75 79 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 74 75 Child ately LOCKS PL 31 Clean Air Ga
112. 563088 Windshield Wiper Washer Control Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are four delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the wind shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers wil
113. 7 Tilting The Seat Up Or Down Power Seat Switches The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four 1 Seat Control directions Pull upward or push downward on the front 2 Seatback Control or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reclining The Seatback WARNING Continued The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release los chest In a collision you could slide under the seat the switch when the desired position is reached E belt which could result in serious injury or death WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous CAUTION Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of Do not place any article under a power seat or control which could cause a collision and serious impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to injury or death the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious path injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted sea
114. 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The TPM Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals ee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles With Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn ON 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn off the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles With Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore t
115. 8 435 General Maintenance iss s oe ace Shas oa a es 494 Glass leamiie as sours he d pots oia SE acie 523 Gross Axle Weight Rating 447 450 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 447 449 si EEDEN E EEN 447 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Eland VIE seegers otras aoe ee on eA 386 Hazard Warming Flasher ses sea rm su em ws Da 464 Head Restraints 424 93 9 echo esse cated RA SOL 188 Headlight Washers ss ad sce Rg eee e Ae is 505 bleddie 245 uus Ea ex Pb HASE os eed PRX 535 AUNOU xs 66 e sno eGo DE END HEES 198 Bulb Replacement 1225 054625 ER RD RES 534 Cleaning 576 INDEX M Bi TEE EL ET RE SET OE 200 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 203 Lights On Reminder u sa sdb Sese 6 sa 201 On With WIPES e steep oF eee RR 199 210 355008 pada 3299 ARE 3 936A hea tee des 9 plc 203 SWIC 44644844464 oe ee ae RN ERE b HS 198 Tuned eld asse sea Ee A ES ERROR eS e Bn 200 Washers iss ab 3 a deb TR 0 45845 505 Heated Mirrors su ass ade dope Voi ue d owes aes 98 Heated Seats llli 181 Heater Engine Diek scrisese cs ane DE 364 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 203 Hill Start Assist 22a exam mem e hrs 999 Hitches Taller OWING s o is UA etie do oe ER oy aa 452 Holder C Olli ESE EES RA REG sees 274 oker CUD aea e ri reran e Peas PS 270 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 295 Hood Release ee 196 Ignition A bear ede h dhe tbe ha A oes nnm 12 Diae BU duces
116. 9 O O Mo ON O D 057003765 Seven Pin Connector 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 460 STARTING AND OPERATING M Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range select a lower gear using the AutoStick shift control if equipped NOTE Selecting a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous operation then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for police taxi fleet or frequent trailer tow ing Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize f
117. 9 Hazard Warning Flasher 464 JACK ios ae oe ee bt dS ee EDE 465 JUMP ee duld urusserume dex es chaos 475 Verea iss RR LE AR a dora BR dud d 464 TOWING he cae TE OE ER S E supe BS as 484 Emission Control System Maintenance 491 nuo eC coe ey boy ee 490 dl ua wA VERE EE EST ET 498 Block Healt on nto ee gnc ER ogee HG 364 Break In Recommendations 81 Checking Oil Level sooie oni ens ES 495 Compartment 53 292 93 994924 129 4 295 489 490 Compartment Identification 489 N INDEX 573 Coolant Antifreeze 00 509 539 COOMA 5 456543646 Pd dE ADS PUR ees 508 Exhaust Gas Caution 82 439 Fails to Start usse x ne ode bein em eR oo 363 Hooded ENS idea Ghee es ees OVS 363 Fuel Requirements ss 4 xv KERR rani 435 Jup EE ENE we ase ARE Rx DAAR HS e esee 475 Multi Displacement 5 22 a9 is OR PRED 44 55 390 Oil rn 495 538 539 Ol Change Interval ss ande tiena 304 496 Oid Fidler Cap 446 ties nu de eee neyo S 496 497 Od EE pe oes ees RA BRA PAS a hee ot 498 Oil Eddie Di pos d ss zh aes ae cea ates 498 Oil Selection soas EERS 4440484646 496 538 OU ele Gag nn eecnceneee soaee es 497 Oe Seicaaevecsense Hea DRA DS 464 DearS uae e ess bee eee eae P OPES 260 lemperature Gauge 4 63e br EUER Y 294 Engine Oil VISEOSID was cee y ene RES RS 496 497 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 66 Entty 5ystem l minated 4 4 04 qp dE eR ARRA 20 Is daro PPEC
118. Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 562 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Informa
119. D OPERATING 371 WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recre ational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode if equipped to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup During extremely cold temperatures 22 F 30 C or below transmission operation may be modified depend ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as
120. E ee MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you This feature will be defaulted on and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse 030407085 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 030436523 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side c
121. EER N ne oe 512 Appearance Care sorser rasia teagi 9 rx 519 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 17 Assist Hill Start sones a5 44d eae GE PRA DERE 399 Auto Down Power Windows 37 Auto Unlock Doors celeres 30 Auto Up Power Windows sie 520446849 RE 37 N INDEX 569 Automatic Dimming Mirror i e sesse da RE s 94 Automatic Door LOCKS 2444464 44 EER EE oS 30 Automate Headliglts esa as End DR datas oo 198 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 304 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 351 Automatic Transaxle peer AddiINVES MP 516 Automatic Transmission 366 373 516 517 ies diie AE cu bene yee aod eee ooo 517 540 N nie PPP 360 Fluid and Filter Changes a2 sau c0g lt O9 SORS 517 Pd COES sorrire ia PEU PX REN PRSE 517 Fud Level Check ss guess se ma gene ates 4 517 Dd TS ooie eu yo 37 ee eee 540 DDecIdl A GUTES quu dct DANE iode Xe 516 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 3 2 gend A 4088654 eke bes 380 Pole lie ss EE ER EE BRA tenet esse ees 540 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 540 b Eilers olie ean sa DE bu VEE see ewe 408 nc A T 499 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 23 seco PPP 499 Belts Seat 2444 MOER Gan os one gra S ES 43 83 Body Mechanism Lubrication 504 Drake Assist SIE uoces AR irasi khitani 396 Brake Control System Electronic sis iss ed me 395 brake did 221 veg 9e Eu OE ONE OPEET
122. ERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Mode Touch the Mode soft key to change this display When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status press and release the Day Night or Auto soft key then by touch the arrow back soft key e Language Touch the Language soft key to change this display When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the English French Fran ais or Spanish Espa ol soft key to select the language preferred Then touch the arrow back soft key As you continue the information will display in the selected language 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Units Touch the Units soft key to change this display When in this display you may switch the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric then touch the arrow back soft key As you continue the information will display in the selected units of measure e Voice Response Touch the Voice Response soft key to change the Voice Response Length settings To change the Voice Response Length press and release the Brief or Long soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Touch Screen Beep Touch the Touch Screen Beep soft ke
123. ES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 5 At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for ea
124. Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park Ing 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020241333 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Or Accessory On Message Opening the driver s door when the ignition is in ACC or ON engine not running a chime will sound to remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF In addition to the chime the ignition or accessory on message will display in the cluster NOTE With the Uconnect Touch system the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING CAUTION e When leaving the vehicle always ON the key An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always fob from the igni
125. G YOUR VEHICLE NOTE e After pressing the door handle LOCK button you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors using either Passive Entry door handle This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking e The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle s interior door panel Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each passenger door WINDOWS trim panel which operate the passenger door windows Power Windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition The window controls on the driver s door control all the 1 in the ACC or ON RUN position door windows NOTE For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect Touch the power window switches will remain active NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the Key Fob Occupants particularly unattended children can be come entrapped by the windows while operating the power window swit
126. G YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING For best poss
127. GINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e f your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465 e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum WARNING WARNING heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a You or others can be badly burned by hot engine supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If from the engine cooling system you see or hear steam coming from under the hood tAUHON do not open the hood until the radiator has had time CAUTION to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure Driving with a hot cooling system could damage cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the the air conditioner turned off until the
128. HE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touch screen or press the button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the button and say Send 3 7 4 6 Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For example if you previously created a Phone book entry with First and or Last Name as Voicemail Password then if you press the button and say Send Voicemail Password the Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored e Y
129. HICLE M Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Audio Device Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and or Audio Device within range If you would need to choose a particular Phone or Audio Device follow these steps e Touch the Settings hard key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Touch to select the particular Phone or the Phone Audio soft key and then an Audio Device e At the Options pop up screen touch the Connect Device soft key e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device e Touch the Settings hard key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Select the Phone or Audio Device e At the Options pop up screen touch the Disconnect Device soft key e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device e Touch the Settings hard key e Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key e Select the Phone or Audio Device e At the Options pop up screen touch the Delete De vice soft key e Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite Touch the Settings hard key Touch the Phone Bluetooth soft key Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the currently connected device At the Options pop up screen touch the Make Favor ite
130. ING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine OFF When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK before the engine can be turned off This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK This system also locks the shift lever in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position unless the brakes are applied To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Eight Speed Automatic Transmission 3 6L Engine The transmission gear display PRND located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range T
131. ION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 10 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 11 Fuel Door Reminder The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the lt Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle 12 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 13 Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 14 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ies ABS The light will turn on when the ig
132. M NOTE Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when Read Messages the vehicle is not in moving If you receive a new text message while your phone is 68 sd FM 91 7 NW 54 ou TE connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will Messaging Inbo RA be made to notify you that you have a new text message inbox E3 14 James Butler i Listen AE M FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Ye 72 13 248 576 5459 Listen M BEEAUS bj 12 Beatrice Adams i Listen James Butler 9 39 am 12 08 08 i Hey Bill am on my way to work Let me know if you have me 11 Sanjiv Prabaker Ee Listen fm 10 Lin Ford i Listen 9 Jay Kay Listen N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Once a message is received and viewed or listened to IEEPTIPEEVITE 10 10 NW 54 on you will have the following options Mastaging gt NOW Message e Send a Reply mbor 1 vas A 2 No e Forward wee OR 3 Call me id Call 4 Need directions Send Messages Using Soft Keys 5 I ll be there in XX minutes G Okay You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the messaging soft key then New Message If multiple numbers are available for the contact select which number you would like to have the message e Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person sent ou wish to send the message to y 5 e Press Send or Cancel 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
133. N including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing zits the tire size two di ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 Tire Terminology And Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation press
134. N OFF button The Cruise Indicator light in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button e The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire if equipped To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can
135. NDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons S 1 or 2 on the driver s door during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped stop mov ing A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver s seat moves depends on where you have the driver s seat positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go e When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver s seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver s seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position e When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go the driver s seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver s seat position is between 0 9 in
136. NING YOUR VEHICLE 527 Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Natural Red Axle Disconnect 4 Fuse Spare Yellow 50 Fuse Spare UU SN Red Module Yellow 52 Fuse Spare 53 O Fuse Spare Ka Na Ij KEN 37 10 Amp Engine Controller eke 38 10 Amp Airbag Module Red 39 10 Amp _ Power Steering Red Module AC Clutch Relay 528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center _ ec and bu Rear Power Distribution Center Opening The Access Panel MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529 CAUTION Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse e When installing the power distribution center Prone PDC bead dil cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop Fuse Spare erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution Front PDC Feed 2 center and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Exterior Lighting 2 Interior Lighting Washer Pump use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating EE EET xterior Lighting 1 The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated or PM 53
137. OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel or Help These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear available commands press the Uconnect Voice Command button and say Help You will hear avail able commands for the screen displayed Natural Speech Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly Smith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which th
138. ONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 565 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Gra
139. Phone will dial the number associated 3 with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe Call Controls The touch screen allows you to control the following call Dial By Saying A Number features e Recent Call Log NOTE All of the above operations except Redial can be done with 1 call or less active e Press the button to begin e Answer e After the Listening prompt and the following beep e End say Dial 248 555 1212 e The Uconnect Phone will dial 248 555 1212 e Ignore Hold unhold Mute unmute 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Transfer the call to from the phone e Swap 2 active calls e Join 2 active calls together Touch Tone Number Entry e Touch the Phone soft key e Touch the Dial soft key e The Touch Tone screen will be displayed e Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and touch Call To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the button while in a call and say 1234 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phonebook Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types e Incoming Calls e Outgoing Calls e Missed Calls e All Calls These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the button and say Show my incom ing c
140. Power Tilt Telescoping Steering Column If O Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC 223 PGMS C IT 212 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 PIO Civile 5s uu oben 93 9g S ROER ts 224 B Forward Collision Warning If Equipped 240 o To bet A Desired ACC Speed ew ws 224 W Parksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped 243 Fi io Earieel iss Ot ae ends eae odo Heese 226 O Parksense Sensors soe GE AE Reps een 244 Hi de dare OM us vu 3 pu pee eee tees ye as 226 O Parksense Warning Display El Te Resume seed nos a sedo ar ES PARA KOR E 227 O Parksense Display 4 a 22 ec Ed DR SERE EL To Maty The Speed Setting sacri DER 227 H Enabling And Disabling Parksense 247 O Setting The Following Distance In ACC 228 O Service The Parksense Rear Park Assist Hi Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Menu 230 Es o e hate fae fe SIGUE bed HE a UOS 248 o Display Warnings And Maintenance 292 EE ET 5 Precautions While Driving With ACC ma DER EE EE URE es ee s El General Information es 2 gs 290 rtis in NON ein m EE 251 O Normal Fixed Speed Cruise l us Control Mode 000 cee eee 238 5 Turning Parkview On Or Off With Touch Screen Radio sad uub neg aeb HERE 253 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Mi Overhead Console O Front Map Reading Lights O Sunglass Bin Door Mi Garage Door Opener If Equipped oO Before You Begin Pr
141. R VEHICLE 163 NOTE You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth than these com mands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and for John Smith underlined in the gray shaded boxes e You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e You can replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls e Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation e You can replace 4 with any message number shown on the screen 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATU
142. REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear EQUIPPED camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear appears again Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate istance to the rear of the vehicle Red o 0 1ft 0 30cm When displayed static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to 3 o a hitch receiver The static grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone Yellow 0 1ft 3ft 0cm 1m 3 ft or greater 1 m or greater 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM WARNING CAUTION Drivers must be careful when backing up even when e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always be used as a parking aid The Park View camera is check carefully behind
143. RES OF YOUR VEHICLE M VOICE COMMAND Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 Nav The Uconnect Voice Command system al ti VR lows you to control your AM FM radio satel lite radio disc player SD Card USB iPod and Sirius Travel Link NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Command system as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Command system to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Uconnect Voice Command button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command If no command is spoken the system will say one of two responses e didn t understand e I didn t get that etc If a command is not spoken a second time the system will respond with an error and give some direction as what can be said based on the context you are in After three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR session with end Pressing the Uconnect Voice Command button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can say a command This will become helpful once you start to learn the options N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
144. RIVE BRAAF r jj TOW Ut m gt b HAUL BATTERY HEATED MRHOR WWOSHELD INSTRUMENT PAWEL SEAT BELT SLENG DOUe TE AR CONDITIONING CHILO SEAT NECOCAMION WA DATWC TOW MALI CHARGING DETROST ILLUMINATION TERR ANCOR SUTTON E N 4 66 A W Cu br NS J w A Low URE ANON ANOHOSE GLOW PLUG POWER WMDSHIELO WEER JUE ARBAG ARNa sua 0008 MOONMELT MAZANI FOUR EEL STEERING FUIN AND WASHER CHLOREN LU LATCH BIITTON ORWE LOW SRS N id A c CY e aE amsaa AV Aa SS p 1i PUSH as MALFUNCTION ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL FASSENGER DOOR ALAR COWVERTIELE Cole SEE OWNERS Am ELECTRONIC INDICATOR LIGHT on Tema TEMPERATUPE RESTWANTSYSTEM AMAAG OFF Tor DOWN MANUAL SO CONDGIONER CONTROL OFF 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title 010805185 VIN Location The vehicle identifi
145. RS EE FEE CAES E 539 ONASSIS MMC PLC 540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 074438716 1 Integrated Power Module Fuses 5 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 4 Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L e 6 9 e erase Integrated Power Module Fuses 5 Engine Oil Fill 2 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 6 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 4 Air Cleaner Filter 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
146. S malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 9 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of C5 an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CAUT
147. T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 556 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Velde iss D P 559 O Prepare For The Appointment 959 aie eie Mi a aciei dre edo 9d ELEK 339 O Be Reasonable With Requests 559 W if You Need Assistance 559 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 560 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 560 Ain Mexico Contact s a eea don ace ea tad 560 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 561 BI eve CONOCI uos messie nee sees tes 3 561 W Warranty Information 562 E MOPARS Paris sous xd em e ER 562 Bl Reporting Safety Defects 562 O In The 50 United States And Washington BENE OM oe ee eee ee ee ee
148. There are two ways to change the set speed e Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the desired speed and press the SET button e Tap the RES or SET button to increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments respec tively Hold the RES or SET button for 5 mph 8 km h increments To Cancel The system will disable normal Cruise Control without erasing the memory if e You softly tap or depress the brake pedal e You press the CANCEL button 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Sys tem ESC TCS activates To Resume Press the RES button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal The EVIC will display the last set speed To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if e You push and release the ON OFF button e You turn off the ignition e You switch off ESC If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated the system will return to the last driver setting ACC or Normal Cruise Control Forward Collision Warning If Equipped Forward Collision Warning FCW warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front of you and prompts the driver to take action in order to avoid the collision FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller EBC wheel speed sensors i e to calculate a probable
149. UR VEHICLE ee A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node KIN Keyless Enter N Go Feature This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter N Go feature refer to Starting Procedure in Starting And Operating for further information Keyless Ignition Node KIN This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is in the passenger compartment The Keyless Ignition Node KIN has four operating positions three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position The three positions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The fourth position is START during start RUN will illuminate NOTE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button the RKE transmitter Key Fob may have a low or dead battery In this situation a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch Put the nose side side opposite of the emergency key of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch Keyless Ignition Node KIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key
150. When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer Please see your authorized dealer for service Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming To change the current setting refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage Or Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door
151. When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally When in Partial Off mode the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced e To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 mode is overcome turn the ESC on again by momen tarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activatio
152. a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away a sssest from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking Parking Brake brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise When the parking brake is applied with the ignition the load on the transmission locking mechanism may switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The the instrument cluster will illuminate parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle 392 STARTING AND OPERATING ie WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be su
153. a resting place for the rear occupant s elbows 035139997 Rear Seat Cupholders Lighted Cupholders If Equipped On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passengers The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control Refer to Lights in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle for further information P Light Ring In Rear Cupholder 274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE STORAGE Glovebox Storage The glovebox storage compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel Opened Glovebox Storage Compartment Console Features There is an open cubby bin located forward of the shift lever Glovebox Storage Compartment Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the center console armrest 035335227 Center Console Inside the center console armrest there is a removable upper storage tray that can be slid forward rearward on rails for access to the lower storage area This tray has an UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275 integrated coin holder along with additional area for small items like an ipod or phone Below the upper tray the lower storage compartment is made for larger items like CDs and tissue boxes In addition the 12 volt power outlet USB and Aux jack are located here WARNING Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the
154. ab through the access port on the center con sole WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481 MANUAL PARK RELEASE 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION 3 6L Engine WARNING Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake before activating the Manual Park Release Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or chiit Lever verde death for those in or around the vehicle 6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position 051210780 In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL transmission will not shift out of PARK such as a dead 8 Reinstall the rubber tray into the storage bin Sae NSN a 482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release 2 Using a small screwdriver or similar tool fish the NOTE To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintention tether strap up through the opening in the console base ally firmly apply the parking brake 3 Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the lever and disengage the spring steel lever locking tab by 1 R h l i h l NE i emove the console storage bin to access the Manua pushing tto the right Park Release lever 061541306 061541305 Console Storage Bin 4 While hold
155. acard pressure inflation value Once the system receives the updated tire pres sures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing or change color back to the original color and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not no da received Fr g 3 oa B SE i a Se SU P SL s f P3 Bass ae M 81979401 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that
156. afety and prevent damage to your vehicle NS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 387 Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued 388 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Continued WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for
157. age to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor ee STARTING AND OPERATING 427 NOTE e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure the tire or condition Base System e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless while adjusting your tire pressure technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire cau n wing on a BE PERD i i e Canses wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire ee ene ra tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the stopping ability tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte and to maintain the proper pressure nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pres
158. ake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous P
159. al law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Continued NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 439 CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition WARNING malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly some light smoke your engine may be out of tune Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon or malfunctioning and may require immediate monoxide poisoning service Contact your authorized dealer for service e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon assistance monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can e The use of fuel additives which are now being kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as sold as octane enhancers is not recommended a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the Most of these products contain high concentra engine running for an extended period If the tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine performance problems resulting from the use of running for more than a short period adjust the such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the manufacturer the vehicle Continued NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con trol system can result in civil penal
160. al method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513 When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added con
161. alls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will display a pop up showing Answer or Ignore Press the Answer soft key or the button on the steering wheel to accept the call Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Uconnect Phone will then interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will display a pop up showing Answer Ignore or Transfer Press the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while t
162. and 2 7 in 22 7 mm and 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition in the ACC or RUN position 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE e The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver s seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Hood Release Lever TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety Two latches must be released to open the hood catch to the left The safety catch is located under the 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side Center front edge of the hood of the instrument panel Hood Safety Catch 031305159 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING B
163. ar Detection Zones 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK 030440174 BSM Warning Light The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 35 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 20 ft 6 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE e The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones e The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia whe
164. ard into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 For center seating position route the tether strap over the seatback and adjustable headrest with the headrest in the full down position then attach the hook to the tether anchor located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window 022637851 Adjustable Headrest Downward Position Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle NOTE e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the WARNING opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant res
165. are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check
166. arning alert opera tion when the system is detecting an obstacle N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 WARNING ALERTS Rear vi Greater Don 79 39 in 39 25 in 25 12 in Less than in cm 79 in 200 cm 200 100 cm 100 65 cm 65 30 cm 12 in 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1 2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Display Message Park Assist Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Read Detected Detected Detected Detected Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow Continuous Flashing Flashing Flashing Enabling And Disabling ParkSense When the ParkSense soft key is pressed to disable the ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the system the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYS Uconnect Touch System The available choices are Off TEM OFF message for approximately five seconds Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Uconnect Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further Panel for further information information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system is mal
167. art of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 19 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a mal
168. ase of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the 266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See windows down or the sunroof if equipped is in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then
169. ass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 calibrate the compass by touching the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Audio e Equalizer Touch the Equalizer soft key to change this display When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Bass Mid Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting e Balance Fade Touch the Balance Fade soft key to change this display When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings e Speed Adjusted Volume Touch the Speed Adjusted Volume soft key to change this display This feature increases or decreases volume rela t
170. assive Entry equipped door handle is grasped If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed only the driver s door will unlock when the driver s door is grasped With Passive Entry if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver s door opening If driver door first is selected once the driver door is opened the interior door lock unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors or use RKE transmitter e Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle e Personal Settings Linked To FOB If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Memory Linked To FOB soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key
171. at is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac tivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with belt alert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk
172. ate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map e Perform Compass Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft key and completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Audio After pressing the Audio soft key the following settings will be available e BalancelFade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 e Equalizer When in this display you may adjust the Bass Mid and Treble settings Adjust the settings with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE Bass Mid Treble al
173. atus Bar When in this display you may turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Safety Assistance After pressing the Safety Assistance soft key the fol lowing settings will be available e Front Collision Sensitivity If Equipped The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change the FCW status touch and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Park Assist The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
174. ave pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversize
175. ay occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACC IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control ACC increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways However it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control ACC utilizes a radar sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you NOTE e If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you ACC will maintain a fixed set speed e If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration not to exceed the original set speed automatically to maintain a preset following distance while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 WARNING WARNING Continued e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC is a convenience e The ACC system system It is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always th
176. be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain m
177. before filter 128 000 miles 208 000 km L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the engine air cleaner filter irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the air conditioning filter 120 000 miles 195 000 km Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect the CV joints Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect exhaust system Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for and filter five speed transmission only damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Replace the accessory drive belt s Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the fleet or frequent trailer towing All Wheel Drive AWD front axle fluid All Wheel Drive AWD M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 554 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ee 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 102 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule H Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the en
178. bricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505 NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir
179. cation number VIN is also located on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart ment INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING ues Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS HA Word About Your Keys 12 O Keyless Ignition Node KIN 12 od de 2 24 dg ayes au ER EE EE a 13 O Ignition Or Accessory On Message 14 W Sentry Key EE EE OR N 15 E Replacement Keys 2 2 2644 RS RTT ES 16 O Customer Key Programming 17 O General Information 222 c9 be rege 17 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped O Rearming Of The System o To Arm The System o To Disarm The System ue doe scr ee RE Bi illuminated Entry If Equipped ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE D To Unlock The Doors o To Lock The Doors O To Unlatch The Trunk 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee El Using The Panic Alarm sis ase EERS SS 22 O Programming Additional Transmitters 20 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 23 O General Information 24 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 D How To Use Remote Start 25 MH Door Locks SS ee 28 O Manual Door Locks
180. ch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C e Transmission in NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position NOTE Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Steering Lever 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee To unlock the steering column pull the lever downward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the lever upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to
181. ch remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held transmit ter button 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaini
182. ch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Lock When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Sound Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 e 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button NOTE If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks all doors will unlock no matter which P
183. ches Such entrapment may re sult in serious injury or death AUTO Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTO down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during I the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly AUTO Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be su
184. child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint Folded Rear Seatback system When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steer ing column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter can also be programmed to recall the same posi tions when the UNLOCK button is pressed NOTE e Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions e Passive Entry door handles cannot be linked to the memory function Use either the memory recall switch or the RKE transmitter if linked to the memory feature to recall memory positions 1 or 2 The memory seat switch is located on the driver s do
185. ching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 159 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Memm Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calling Uconnect Hands Free Calling The commands can be spoken from any screen gfier pushing tha connect Phones ation te on be Available commands while phone call is in progress steerina wheel g The canere csi bic spoken ah HY gaton while s GM e ve iie tushla Vie Leona vors conimend bulion to pn the steering whsel Shows Ihe Number Last Last associated number incoming wall list will geh a JO SEM Number ia Dial Tones for wth entry i5 called is call is seh Metn try dialed numbers stored In dialed redialed dialed ie SHOWN Smith with al for 1234 F Voiceniall stored are sent Password are numbers sarit 030863306 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 NOTE e You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone e You can replace John Smith with any name in your number supported by your Mobile phone mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to for John Smith e f your phone does not support phonebook download e You can replace Mobile with Home Work or or call log download over Bluetooth than these com Other d mands will r
186. cle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg STARTING AND OPERATING 411 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 2 130 Ibs Occupant 3 160 Ibs ts E 100 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL
187. cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn
188. come misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 e Rain Sensing Touch the Rain Sensing soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Hill Start Assist If Equipped Touch the Hill Start Assist soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the Hill Start Assist HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selection touch the Hill Start Assist soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Lights e Headlight Off Delay Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Illuminated Approach Touch the Illuminated Approach soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will activate a
189. construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 406 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TI
190. corded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your chil
191. cs 374 N AutoStick If Equipped 380 H Operation 3 6L Engine sedes esses 380 EH Op ration 9 7 LEBgIBE ina de e pads 381 la Sport Mode If Equipped 383 N All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 384 Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 385 EA aeleid OM m 385 E TIGCHOH sa Sats Me EE BA ER BU es UAE ed 386 Bl Driving Through Water 386 oO Flowing Rising Water 387 Shallow Standing Water ies rr WED 387 NM Power Steering a sce cedas HPP ORE NEE MR 389 N Multi Displacement System MDS If Equipped 5 7L Engine Only 390 aM Parking Brake 42744444402 sean pes a eee oe 390 Bl Anti Lock Brake System 393 N Electronic Brake Control System 395 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 395 B Traction Control System TCS 395 U Brake Assist System BAS os 00 9 Vs sous 396 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 397 B Hill Start Assist HSA 399 A Ready Alert Braking asse SURE es 401 E Rain Brake Support 5s sp 5445 s oes 401 O ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC Off Indicator Light se 2m sere x 401 NS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 357 ELS Chon BOE tis scog eR REA ds 402 CO Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 416 W Tire Safety Information 403 O Full Size Spare If Equipped 417 A Tite Markings sou wo ace RR ed RC AUR esa
192. cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precau tion turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever rearward with the brake pedal released after you have placed it in PARK Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued 376 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine off When the
193. cure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button for unauthorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled If something 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro vide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument clus
194. curity Alarm can be disarmed using any of the key to the ON position the following methods NOTE 2 e Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Entry RKE transmitter Security Alarm e Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if equipped refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further infor mation The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether press the Keyless Enter N Go Start Stop button you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors e Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn w
195. d Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Clock After pressing the Clock soft key the following settings will be available e Sync Time With GPS When in this display you may automatically have the radio set the time To change the Sync Time setting touch the Sync with GPS Time soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Set Time Hours When in this display you may adjust the hours The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 hours up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Set Time Minutes When in this display you may adjust the minutes The Sync with GPS Time soft key must be unchecked To make your selection touch the or soft keys to adjust the minutes up or down Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft key to close out of the settings screen e Time Format When in this display you may select the time format display setting Touch the Time Format soft key until a check mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Show Time In St
196. d Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat Both types of child restraints are 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH WARNING Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag unless the air bag is turned off An air bag deployment could ca
197. d or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather This system can be operated through either the Automatic Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect Touch system display When the Uconnect Touch system is in different modes Radio Player Settings More etc the driver and pas senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the display E 044336084 General Overview Hard Keys Hard keys are located on the left and right side of the Uconnect Touch 4 3 screen in the center of the instru ment panel There are also hard keys located below the Uconnect Touch screen Uconnect Touch System 4 3 Hard key 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Soft Keys So
198. d Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats 2 NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Air Bag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Knee Impact Bolster Driver Advanced Front Air Bag Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
199. d button Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the button and say a command or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu You can also press the or buttons when the system is listening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu NOTE Pressing the or buttons while the system is playing is known as Barging In refer to Barge In Overriding Prompts for further information N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK 1 Press the Phone soft key on the screen to begin 2 If there is no phone currently connected with the system a pop up will appear
200. d operating information e Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the outside rear view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE To make your selection touch the Tilt Mirrors In Reverse soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Blind Spot Alert Touch the Blind Spot Alert soft key to change this dis play When this feature is selected the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off Lights or Lights and Chime The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Moni tor BSM system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors When Lights amp Chime mode is activated the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the OFF Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have be
201. d recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation 1 Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Access Door 2 Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503 LERAAR Ak ka AA AAN Filter Access Cover A C Air Filter 3 Remove the used filter 5 Close the filter access cover 4 Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the maintenance intervals vehicle text and arrows on the filter will indicate this 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lu
202. dditional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below OF 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation NS TA TING AND OPERATING 443 Replacement Parts ADDING FUEL Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts 1 Press the fuel filler door release switch located in the driver s door map pocket CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not us
203. de improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING The driver and front passenger seats should be
204. dealer service the air bag system immediately 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the air bag it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Sup
205. defined on the Tire and Load ating for information on tire pressures and for proper ing Information placard tire inflation procedures Continued Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for informa tion on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for information on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace ment procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits ee STARTING AND OPERATING 457 Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 lbs 907 kg 458 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION WARNING Continued
206. des The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 566 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the m
207. ding power steering assist then the system will provide mechanical steering capability CAUTION Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering assistance in order to prevent damage to the system Normal operation will resume once the system is allowed to cool STARTING AND OPERATING 389 If the SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM el message and a flashing icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation If the POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP mes sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen it indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature con dition no longer exists Once driving conditions are safe then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 390 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE e Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera tional it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under thes
208. dio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode When in Audio Surround mode balance is set auto matically Fader control is available in surround mode but should be set to the center position for optimal surround performance STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches am ie 045036190 Remote Sound System Controls The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you h
209. e center console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271 035135226 Retractable Cover Front Cupholders 272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Heated and Cooled Cupholders If Equipped Press the Cold symbol once to turn on the cupholder Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off cupholders The cupholders are designed to help keep Press the Hot symbol once to activate the cupholder warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder WARNING When using the cupholder in the Heat position avoid contact with the heated portion of the cup holder in order to reduce the possibility of burns Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injuries medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise par ticular care in order to prevent serious burn injury Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects when operated in the Heat position Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273 Rear Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining
210. e BACK button to scroll back to a BACK previous menu or sub menu Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays The EVIC display consists of three sections 1 The top line where compass direction odometer line and outside temperature are displayed 2 The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed 3 The reconfigurable telltales section The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu The main display area also displays pop up messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn ing or information messages These pop up messages fall into several categories e Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen Most of the messages of this type are then stored as long as the condition that activated it remains active and can be reviewed from the Messages main menu item As long as there is a stored message an i will be displayed in the EVIC s compass outside temp line Examples of this message type are Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out and Low Tire Pressure N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 e Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared Examples of this message type are Turn Signal On if a
211. e GE Gee eee Shee eae 94 LAT sues es todd eee eae Bawa se 74 75 Automatic DINING uu 39 4 o rur ore 94 L brication DOO sss esenee apai kio aaa RE 504 Elesiri Powered 2 aca d ERAS HAS AR 97 Electric Remote iesca sase ecco ti cenas ai 97 Maintenance Free Battery sois sax dare ER 499 EXIGHOP PORE serais napina E ERU SURE 96 Maintenance Procedures lesus 494 laci TP 98 Maintenance Schedule 542 Suc ccr 95 Maintenance General eee 494 Rearview s 94 Maintenance Sunroof s sci edu 425 ars ees 266 o season ys E S 98 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 289491 Mode Manual Transmission 00008 518 Puel Saver 244454545 uw RES ES E RS RU 305 Fluid Level Check 518 Modifications Alterations Vehicle I 10 580 INDEX NEE id Monitor Tire Pressure System sis se cw ER RS 425 Mopar dal oos 2 oom sae ee GG ee Oe RE 493 562 NITBE EIDE 2542122221 RSS EIU RP seuss Ha 437 Multi Displacement Engine System 390 Multi Function Control Lever i s es ee sd 202 Navigation System Uconnect gps 291 New Vehicle Break In Period 81 Occupant Restraints s use o ceeded e d Sees 41 62 66 Occupant Restraints Sedan 57 58 62 65 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 539 eon AM 286 OU Change Indicator 4 3 ke ES RR he es 287 304 Oil Change Indicator Reset
212. e Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 421 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire
213. e ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition is cycled off e Turn on the interior
214. e Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil
215. e children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Power Door Lock Switch Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter N Go Passive Entry system For further information refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open and the ignition is in the ACC or ON RUN position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is disabled
216. e conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers e If the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS IF EQUIPPED 5 7L ENGINE ONLY This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on
217. e driver s responsibil ity to be attentive of road traffic and weather conditions vehicle speed distance to the vehicle ahead and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always re quired while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury Continued Does not react to pedestrians oncoming ve hicles and stationary objects e g a stopped ve hicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle Cannot take street traffic and weather condi tions into account and may be limited upon ad verse sight distance conditions Does not predict the lane curvature or the move ment of preceding vehicles and will not compen sate for such changes Does not always fully recognize complex driv ing conditions which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings Can only apply a maximum of 25 of the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING You should switch off the ACC system e When driving in fog heavy rain heavy snow sleet heavy traffic and complex driving situations e g in highway construction zones When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp when driving on roads that are winding icy snow cov
218. e driver door handle grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver s door automatically The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked 021837301 Grabbing The Driver s Door Handle NOTE If Unlock All Doors 1st Press is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver s door handle To select between Unlock Driver Door 1st Press and Unlock All Doors 1st Press refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie To Unlock From The Passenger Side With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the passenger door handle grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati cally The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked NOTE All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver s door unlock preference setting Unlock Driver Door 1st Press or Unlock All Doors 1st Press Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position If one of the vehicle doors i
219. e ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your 056837179 vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and Fuel Filler Door Release Switch may affect driveability 444 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 Open the fuel filler door 4 Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe the a ee nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling NOTE Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches allowing the flapper door to open 5 Fill the vehicle with fuel when the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 6 Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door NOTE A funnel is provided located in the trunk in the spare tire area to open the flapper door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can 056810781 Fuel Filler Door 3 There is no fuel filler cap A flapper door inside the pipe seals the system STARTING AND OPERATING 445 WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank ar O is being filled C Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Fuel Funnel CAUTION Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
220. e ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased 474 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 110 ft lb 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 11 Stow the jack tools and flat tire Make sure the base of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener WARNING e A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided e Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately Road Tire Installation 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
221. e seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even normal conditions However in an accident the belt will on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the and cause an accident that includes you This can happen vehicle or being thrown out far away from home or on your own street 2 Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they WARNING can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or So
222. e sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHTS Headlight Switch Cy The headlight switch is located on the left side of T the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instru ment panel lights instrument panel light dimming inte rior lights and fog lights Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight parking light and instrument panel light operation Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 Headlights On With Wipe
223. e switch a second time The Lights are mounted in the overhead console Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened The lights will can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is the console These buttons are backlit for night time pressed ery Sunglass Bin Door At the front of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compart ment access is a push push design Push the chrome pad on the door to open Push the chrome pad on the door to close 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights 033333448 Sunglass Bin Door GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink chan nels HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is r
224. e used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery WARNING in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Start e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into ing in What To Do In Emergencies for further information the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued 364 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Clearing A Flooded Engine Using ENGINE START STOP Button If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel press and hold the brake pedal push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it then press and release the ENGINE START STOP button once The starter motor will engage automatically run for 10 seconds and then disengage Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater co
225. e user can respond without pressing the Uconnect Voice Command button 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Voice Commands The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are avail able at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect Voice Com mand button Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Starting Voice Recognition VR Session in Radio Player Modes In this mode you can say the following commands NOTE The commands can be said on any screen when a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice Command button Disc To switch to the disc mode say Change source to Disc This command can be given in any mode or screen e Track to change the track NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Voice Tree Commands only available in AM FM mode Audio will change to 950 AM Uconnect Voice Command AM FM Satellite Radio avallable commands These commands can be spoken when the AM FM or Satellite radio is playing ME VR after pushing the
226. ear Monitoring 030405537 Overtaking A pproaching UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Overtaking Passing Stationary Objects The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage berms etc However occasionally the system may alert on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked Proceed Opposing Traffic slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear d
227. ecommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display CLEAR ING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC displays CHANNELS CLEARED NOTE e Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons e If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program UNDERSTANDING THE FEATUR
228. econds 4 Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHAN NEL TRAINED then release both buttons NOTE e It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train e If the EVIC displays DID NOT TRAIN repeat from Step 2 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button The EVIC will display CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button Security To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn follow these steps in your vehicle 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To erase the channels press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display 3 CLEARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC displays CHANNELS CLEARED 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming Step 2 and follow all remaining steps The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm
229. ect Phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally reguires you to enter in a touch tone seguence on your mobile phone keypad you can utilize the touch screen or press the button and say the word Send then the sequence you wish to enter For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 ff you can press the button and say Send 3 7 4 6 Saying Send followed by a number or sequence of numbers is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries For example if you previously created a Phone book entry and or Last Name as Voice Password then if you press the button and say Send Voicemail Pass word the Uconnect Phone will then send the corre sponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e The first number encountered for that contact will be sent All other numbers entered for that contact will be ignored e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature e Pauses wait or other characte
230. ed in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Manual Seats If Equipped Forward Or Rearward Adjustment The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear ward Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired Using body pressure move forward and rear ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched Manual Seat Adjusting Bar 030934979 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Recline To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back to the desired position and release the lever To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever Manual Recline Lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting
231. ed with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth 524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed FUSES Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment This module contains fuses and re
232. eeen 539 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 539 FOP ET RE EE EE OR EE EE 201 286 Folding Redi Deil erres woos Gos POS HAAR HAD 190 Forward Collision Warning 240 300 Ficcine A Stuck Venele sx puadeswerrcpesiese 479 lus ER cack EO EE eee ee eo Ra 435 POGIUVCS 046 ON AS EE eee oe DIRAS 438 Clean AI 24444624 EEU REMS SEE NAG BA 436 CONsCIVING se os Be eee eine a ge ie ER Oo 305 Eihanol 5 2442654 une ogee eens bees 437 Filler Door Gas Cap iss ios e oe ama 290 GasOWNe is EER oe Yara BEG hs DRA IG 435 GOUDE Frends ee a ee E IP 290 LIGNE 122249597 P 153 be oho EO RD HG 300 Materials Added 438 N INDEX 575 bien sos iek EA BOAS ous ee 45 437 Jde di eee OO EE AG 599 Paver Mode rrr 305 DDGCHICHIOBS 22 5 2x he RA BE en d up deu os 539 Tok ee SALE HEET EER e 538 FUCLOOURUIZEE 35 acras a dor d segop p are OER HE ien 305 Piel den ooi us Pee ance EX Pd ES aoe 305 Fuel Flexible leen 440 DUO Ge veces eee ues Pues Pee ei OE e 524 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 20D Gasoline Fuel ias aes Ged RREWG E E REPAS 435 Soros RELEASE EE ma EE a 305 Gasoline Clean Air SE 436 Gasoline Reformulated 436 Gauges Coolant Temperat te uie des Eb ots 294 PUG EE D 290 PPCCUOMCIC PE I BOME ass 290 TA ONC 447444655 5455545546052 en 286 Gear ase aanse RED bas oa es PR RE 368 374 General Information 17 224 129 163 23
233. een built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511 e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent c
234. ehicle for further This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard information Using the wrong type of brake fluid or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be Continued taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued 516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main
235. el Trim Care 521 Wind Buffeting 588 INDEX NEE id Window Fogging 554543 ese one se ES RES 353 Windshield Wiper Blades sii RR S 504 og lt 5 IT 56 Windshield Wipels ass asessori Renee e RS 208 POSUBE ose 9e ER DEE ee EA PS RS R 56 Wiper Blade Replacement issie ses de DR ws 504 Windshield Defroster ie oe RARR wie RR GE De RC st Wiper Delay a ate esae ox her ado Robo eGR 208 Windshield Washers 208 209 Wipers IDntermitlefiU sic sa be dais Red Sd 208 FIG PE 909 Wipers Ram Sensitive uae ie Soe ER EE DE REDE 210 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body Sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as sh
236. elease sn 39 Distribution Center Fuses 524 528 Door Locks 2365 ih ard ee ew ae We ee 29 MITO A LP 97 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 266 DOUG oen ee eee RAS eee oe ee E 178 Dieet NE 2 teGeeteresecieedaee ree aes 389 DOOD 2 5424 SR ESE RR EED EA age 263 Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 212 WINdOWS Goes G44 oe RPG E ER IEEE ES 36 Power Steering Fluid zusenden wa 540 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 53 Preparation Tor Jacking iuge do entitatem e s 468 Pretensioners Deal Des A r TcTTPPT 9l Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry amp sues sn org otn 20 Radial PV MIB xa abad x y bua dope OER dE RUAE 415 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 511 Radio Operation s 4 99 Feresaadoeg iiaii 342 Radio Remote Control ds sig RR RD n 43 Rotes 340 Rain Sensitive Wiper System sus use RR ske 210 eat Camela 22629 E1929 3 tika 244 0044 4464 Rear Cupholder sies 554 ot RE PE HY DS Rear Park Sense System 582 INDEX NEE Id Rear Seat Folie 4624 4444462455 se ae RR DS 190 Rear Window Defroster sen 278 Rear Window Features sen 278 Rearview Mirrors llle 94 Recorder Event Data llle 69 Recreational LOWING 2 akon RR Vi preria 461 Reformulated Gasoline Lis 436 le riet apna erem dU OER SA ERAS oats RE 502 Release Hood leen 196 Reminder lights On ux 9
237. elp keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position or in the ACC position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi PN mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru 2 ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized
238. em Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has b
239. en dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507 CAUTION e The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehic
240. en the vehicle is not in motion is recommended Phonebook Mobile and Favorites name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth in order to use this feature If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the Messaging button will be greyed out and the feature will not be available for use 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
241. ended weather or Show five day forecast or Show sports league screen For example you can say Show ski info to get other forecasts MLB headlines or Show PGA headlines 4 Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face 2 You can replace Headlines with any menu items and shaded grey shown on a league screen For example you can say Show NFL Schedule and results or Show NCAA Basketball AP top 25 or Show Major League Baseball Teams NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Uconnect Voice Command Non phone Universal amp Mode Commands The commands can be spoken on any screen when not on a phone call after pushing the Uconnect voice command button q amp VR an the steering wheel Navigation PI ne Route ayer Home screen will shown on the touch screen Cancels listening to Guidance Prompt is repeated your voice command 030003040 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE 1 Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles 2 You can replace Player with Radio Navigation Phone Climate More or Settings 3 Navigation commands only work if equipped with Navigation 4 Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Uconnect Voice Command Navigation Universal Commands Thus cesrimemo can be spear an any scraum
242. enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Engine Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Headlight Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the or soft key to select your desired time interval Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Compass Settings After pressing the Compass Settings soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compens
243. ent or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in B WARNING the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 416 STARTING AND OPERATING ee vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are en
244. ent transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will only shift up or down when is manually selected by the driver except as described below It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho sen e If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause the transmission ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 to revert to automatic operation The transmission will To disengage AutoStick mode press and hold the also upshift automatically once redline is reached If shift paddle until D or S is once again displayed in the pedal is pressed to the floor the transmission will the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of the downshift when possible based on current vehicle AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off speed and gear the accelerator pedal e If AutoStick is engaged while in SPORT mode WARNING manual gear selection will be maintained until either SPORT mode is exited or as described below The Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a transmission will not upshift automatically at redline slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their in this mode nor will downshifts be obtained if the grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or pedal is pressed to the floor personal injury e In either DRIVE or SPORT mode the transmission will automatically downshi
245. er hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 453 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Frontal Area Max GTW Max Tongue Wt Gross Trailer Wt See Note 22 sq ft 2 04 sq m 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 sq m 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Re fer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information Trailer And Tongue Weight rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your many trailer collisions vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the 454 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle
246. ered slippery or have steep uphill or downhill slopes When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury The Cruise Control system has two control modes e Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles e Normal fixed speed cruise control mode is for cruis ing at a constant preset speed For additional informa tion refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section NOTE The system will not react to preceding vehicles Always be aware of the mode selected You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons The two control modes function differently Always confirm which mode is selected Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Operation The speed control buttons located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the ACC system 032433096 1 DISTANCE SETTING 2 RES 3 SET 4 CANCEL 5 ON OFF 6 MODE NOTE Any chassis suspension modifications to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control ACC You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h When the system is turned on and in the READY state the Electronic Vehic
247. ers and the front seat belt retrac e As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im particles The particles are a normal by product of the mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con process that generates the non toxic gas used for air troller ORC system serviced as well bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag
248. es 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 8 000 miles 13 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 16 000 miles 26 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 545 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 24 000 miles 39 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system In
249. es ote RARR RR 420 Rotation c dbe RES eee ane ee gag ease eu 403 412 DIES Ar m 404 DOW bis M 423 opaie lite PPP A66 PIE ee 54 a Aan d ok RED eee ages 418 Trailer TOWING gos ones 04 AND EER treki 456 Tread Wear Indicators ies cux abu 418 To Open els AAR EE EE HEES 196 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 453 TOWING D T 449 Behind a Motorhome 6644 aces deg CR mh 461 Disabled Vehicle esa sa BAAR AZ ERA 5 484 Cop E HS 453 Rooies asses EE RE REKE RE SS 461 ARE TERRE OR SEE EE a 453 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome 461 TachiOn CODO ss s 6443 oe RR EE EER SPA S 395 THEE TOW 529 2 039 4 323 eet en ates NO 449 Coolinp Systemi IPS 5 x op ca g egiii 461 bids SERE oe a oy ono ce Sua eee oo ES 452 Minimum Requirements ice iis eae KRAAK d 455 o eaten peu hee eae HS HE eee es eee 460 Trailer and Tongue Weight 453 WING ode ske eee gue dude aha eee A cb dos 458 Trailer Towing Guide 25 2 d SEKER KERR EERS 453 di let Wel P rm 453 ans le 6 PPP 518 PWG ELT TT 518 540 Maintenance ardeo pedem qoae doe er eee s 518 TAn SMSO xod x Mime We p DE BEG Rari 516 Aoma cis 2e 2 25 4 GRR Gee 366 373 516 BMG EE EE EE EE GEK ae es xe 540 SONS 4 has Slee Ghee ity reg She E 365 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 00 29 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry sede ee ped Re 20 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 255 N INDEX 587 Transmi
250. etection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph 1 km h to 3 km h to objects moving a maxi mum of approximately 10 mph 16 km h such as in parking lot situations UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 NOTE Ina parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including reducing the radio volume WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM sys
251. eturn a response that the contact does not l exist in the phonebook e You can replace 4 with any message number shown on the screen dio E tepl iva Incoming Calls with Outgoing e Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and Calls or Missed Calls underlined in the gray shaded boxes e Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Text Messaging Reading Text Messages e Gomaeangs car De soccer mar tne teo messe mio s shoe Uconnect Text Messaging Teno eem die nen be tee rone ayy imme men pele en He d bie read Dine me tamer on ME STR WHS Tome ately Uie LAS mm pes plante tela te Ve Um skerm ny mt med Enter message TOM dened kel frrivide m singing IN by system or say tor List to haar ali 18 downloaded defined nessayes town phone p Wig tha message text i Alarme massage displayess tine latinus id eral js pead aul e rxwnerzimde sert cutis ander message nimang ciiis ening me Uconmect phone are avasiable automatically has T Messe nt HG umber i writ try Mesane trat Fnirr messur frm wil e read out dehned lst provide Dy over the system or say List t vehicle asuma hear al 18 defined system meossBsges Enter in contact r dmis saut phone tyne 030863305 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOU
252. ey to change this display This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle s door s without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons To make your selection touch the Passive Entry soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Heated Seats e Auto Heated Seats Touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver s heated seat will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40 F 4 4 C To make your selection touch the Auto Heated Seats soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Engine Off Options e Easy Exit Seats If Equipped Touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key to change this display This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection touch the Easy Exit Seats soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle for further infor mation e Headlight Off Delay Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To change the Headlight Off Delay status touch the 0 30 60 o
253. f is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deacti vated To change the Blind Spot Alert status touch the Off Lights or Lights amp Chime soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification e ParkView Backup Camera Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to check entire surroundings across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate To make your selection touch the ParkView Backup Camera soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection touch the Rain Sensing
254. f the vehicle s braking capability and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill However a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal In addition downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending down hill This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between 3 long 2 me dium and 1 short Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead This distance setting displays in the EVIC ACC 55 mph DISTANCE 3 032433101 Distance Set N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 To change the distance setting press the Distance button and release Each time the button is pressed the distance setting adjusts between long medium and short If there is no vehicle ahead the vehicle will maintain the set speed If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane the EVIC displays the Sensed Vehicle Indi cator icon and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto matically to maintain the distance setting regardless of the set speed The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until e The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed e The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor
255. f inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position ENGINE START STOP Button Functions With Driver s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position The ENGINE START STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch It has four positions OFF ACC RUN and START To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps e Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position e Press the ENGINE START STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position EVIC displays ACC e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position EVIC displays RUN NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 363 e Press the ENGINE START STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position EVIC EN ENG Continue displays OFF e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended oneer and vehicle I the wehicls has dis If Engine Fails To Start charged battery booster cables may b
256. front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger air bag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the Here are some tips on get
257. ft as the vehicle slows to a stop to prevent engine lugging and will display the cur rent gear Tapping the paddle at a stop will allow starting in second gear After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle accelerates Operation 5 7L Engine When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position the transmission will operate automatically shifting between the five available gears To engage AutoStick simply move the shift lever to the right or left while in the DRIVE position or tap one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles if equipped When 382 STARTING AND OPERATING ee AutoStick is active the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up or down when is manually selected by the driver using the shift lever or the shift paddles if equipped unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho sen except as described below e If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode the transmission will automatically shift up when maxi mum engine speed is reached e If AutoStick is engaged while in SPORT mode the transmission will remain in the selected gear even when maximum engine speed is reached The trans mission will upshift only when commanded by the driver e The transmission will automa
258. ft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch system screen FRONT REAR m EET F 045635318 Automatic Climate Controls Hard keys ATC System Shown 045641067 Uconnect Touch System 4 3 Manual Temperature Controls Soft keys UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 If equipped with ATC performing this function will cause the automatic operation to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator will turn off 2 Recirculation Control Button Press and release to change the current setting the indicator illuminates when ON 3 Blower Control ru Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system There are seven blower speeds available Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation if Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Automatic equipped with ATC The speeds can be selected using Temperature Controls Soft keys either hard heys or soft keys as follows Button Descriptions Applies To Both Hard keys And Soft keys 044435866 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start 1 A C Button operation if the blower control is left in the O Off Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting the indicator illuminates when A C is ON 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M position Blower control should be left in the ON
259. function has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 20 O D Overdrive OFF Indicator Light o D This light will illuminate when the O D OFF button has been selected and overdrive has been turned off 21 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first tumed to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for furthe
260. functioning the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SERVICE PARK ASSIST or the SERVICE PARK AS SIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a fault condition the EVIC will display the CLEAN PARK ASSIST SERVICE PARK ASSIST or the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If CLEAN PARK ASSIST appears in the EVIC make sure the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition If the message appears again see an authorized dealer If SERVICE PARK ASSIST or SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the EVIC see an authorized dealer Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operat ing properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations c
261. functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the ON RUN position 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEd To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds The current display will reset along with other functions Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that the setting has been selected Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll thro
262. further information CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring 480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES See WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 5 SPEED TRANSMISSION If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Turn the engine OFF 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Remove the rubber tray from the storage bin located to the right of the shift lever The override access port is near the bottom of the bin to the right of the shift lever gate 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the override t
263. g as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your WARNING abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug internal injury in an accident The belt forces belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but accident across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Removing Slack From Belt 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 6 To release the belt push t
264. g on hills ACC may not detect a vehicle in ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the your lane Depending on the speed vehicle load traffic lane in which you are traveling In the illustration shown conditions and the steepness of the hills ACC perfor ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and mance may be limited it may not detect the vehicle until it s too late for the ACC system to take action ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane There will not be sufficient distance to the lane changing vehicle Always be atten tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane There will not be suffi cient distance to the vehicle ahead 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Stationary Objects And Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles For example ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary General Information FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems Classification Specifications 47 C ER Part 15 47 C ER Part 15 515 Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Co
265. g or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Checking Oil Level 5 7L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 A
266. g traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury To Vary The Speed Setting While ACC is set you can increase the set speed by pressing and holding the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to in crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 1 6 km h While ACC is set the set speed can be decreased by pressing and holding the SET button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to de crease in 5 mph 8 km h increments until the button is released The decrease in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 1 6 km h NOTE When you use the SET button to decelerate if the engine s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25 o
267. gine oil and engine oil L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 144 000 miles 234 000 km 7 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 136 000 miles 221 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 555 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 152 000 miles 247 000 km M A N
268. gineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T 5 Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time N STARTING AND OPERATING 417 WARNING Compact spares are for
269. h in many driving situations including cornering acceleration and braking There are two modes of opera tion e Automatic Auto Mode This is the default position when vehicle ignition is first turned on This mode will give a sporty but comfortable ride Within this mode the suspension will adapt to the vehicle inputs includ ing vehicle speed steering inputs braking and accel eration 384 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Sport Mode This mode is driver selectable when the vehicle is placed in SPORT mode press the CON TROLS button and then the SPORT button on the display screen This mode will set suspension for maximum performance handling and is intended for spirited driving More 058341 463 SPORT Mode When SPORT mode is enabled a flag will light up in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster Descrip tion in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information AUTO mode will be a more soft touring ride where as SPORT will be a firmer sportier suspension for better handling Refer to AutoStick in Starting And Oper ating for further information ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with an active on demand All Wheel Drive AWD system which makes available optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and driving conditions The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as nece
270. he TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the LOW TIRE message will turn off and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 430 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you t
271. he ignition 6 Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack Ing eo Hor example if changing e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic the right front tire block the left rear transmission in PARK a manual transmission in wine REVERSE 060506162 Continued 470 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Continued CAUTION Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a ook Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on jack locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a Instructions for this vehicle jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic 060641852 Jack Warning Label Jacking Locations N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 471 1 Remove the spare tire jack and lug wrench 2 If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle 3 Before raising the vehicle use the lug wrench to loosen but not remove the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 4 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to ak the flat tire Turn
272. he maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR 448 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle show
273. he red button on the buckle Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt allow the belt to retract fully away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it WARNING up or down to the position that fits you best A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as poss
274. he second call is in progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls or from the phone books To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Also you can press the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen Join Calls When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Join Calls soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the End soft key or the button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automati cally This is cell phone dependent Redial e Press the Redial soft key e or press the button and after the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial e The
275. he skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures espe cially if used for long periods Continued WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat 3 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows the brake accelerator and clutch pedals if equipped to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF cushion side shield e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control sys tem is on The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In formation System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjust able Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Adjustable Pedal Disabled Ve
276. he wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel 522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner or equivalent for carpeting Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or MOPAR Satin Select or equivalent Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
277. head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupant s must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Active Head Restraints Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Active Head Restraints AHR In the event of a rear impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head and the AHR The AHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact If the AHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serio
278. heel To make your selection touch the Steering Directed Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlights With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection touch the Flash Head lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEE Doors amp Locks After pressing the Doors amp Locks soft key the following settings will be available e Auto Unlock On Exit When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Flash Headlight With Lock When this feature is selected the headlights will flash whe n the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection tou
279. hicle In Reverse CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage 032036861 Adjustable Pedal Switch to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the toward the front of the vehicle adjustable pedal s path Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 WARNING Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel NO CANCGFI 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the O
280. his light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service For further infor mation refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e SERV AWD Service All Wheel Drive Indicator This light will turn on when the All Wheel Drive feature requires service For further in YE formation refer to All Wheel Drive in Start ing And Operating UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 EVIC Red Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable red telltales These telltales include e Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or T more doors may be ajar e Trunk Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk may be ajar TA j il e Oil Pressure Warning Light Q57 This light indicates low engine oil pressure If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEE Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the
281. hone the favorite e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen NOTE For phones which are not made a favorite the while the system is connecting phone priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest phone paired will have the higher e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take pre cedence over other paired phones within range priority 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M You can also use the following VR commands to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio e Show Paired Phones or e Connect My Phone Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device e Touch the Player soft key to begin e Change the Source to Bluetooth e Touch the Bluetooth soft key e Touch the Add Device soft key NOTE If there is no device currently connected with the system a pop up will appear e Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled audio device When prompted on the device enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch screen e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the
282. hones will be shown 030803044 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE Available Voice Commands are shown in bold Power Seats If Equipped face and shaded grey On models equipped with power seats the switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor SEATS Use this switch to move the driver s seat up or down vehicle NOTE The passenger s seat will move up or down WARNING forward or rearward e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down 3 The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached 03093497
283. hould be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Continued 370 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When shifting into PARK press the lock button on the shift lever and push the lever all the way forward until it stops When released the lever will return to its home position e With brake pedal released look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the trans mission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle ee STARTING AN
284. ible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used Astronomy Zone System Temporarily Unavailable When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will display the message Blind spot system unavailable Astronomy zone The side mirrors LED s will be lit up and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone Uconnect Phone 4 3 Uconnect Touch 4 3 Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone Uconnect Phone supports the following features Voice Activated features e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smiths Mo bile or Dial 248 555 1212 e Redialing last dialed numbers Redial e Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back e View Call logs on screen Show incoming calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recent Calls 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone Smith M
285. ible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery an
286. ible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the I folded webbing Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger _ ALR ALR ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section
287. ice Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 551 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule O C O C O O G G O L LLE Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 3 6L Engine Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the transfer case fluid All Wheel Drive AWD EE EE ee DI Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 552 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Cha
288. icle 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e Electronic Speed Control SET This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is SET For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC ON This light will turn on when the ACC is ON R For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC SET This light will turn on when the ACC is SET For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle EVIC Amber Telltale Lights This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell tales These telltales include e Forward Collision Warning FCW OFF FCW This light warns the driver of a potential colli sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the OFF driver to take action in order to avoid the collision For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Control ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added e Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator This light will turn on to indicate the wind d hu ym shield washer fluid is low e Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Malfunction sr T
289. igh Beam Low Beam Select 203 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 291 ilonnated EMY sake E an bee SARA 20 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 287 425 T strumen E Elsie Gye oath nm HARRY itre 198 TacHon Contool EE pre EIEN 401 Intensity Control eisers odes enna weve ER 206 TUG OIC P 85 202 ICON P eas 205 brush MD PT 98 LICENSE AAR ee RP EAE eee d 097 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 286 Lenis On Reiiidei RE 201 Load Leveling Systemi ou asie a dioe dms eo d 279 em boel 3 3 eure Roe tei RURAL RE SORORE S00 Loading Venice 2s 3 EER HA BREER RD 447 448 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 289 cru 94 243 6245 EE RO m 448 Mee NE eli OT OE EO ET EO et ee es 204 jc srrrrm 408 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 207 N INDEX 579 LOG sass oh bee eee VEER EET 28 Manual Service 244 424 EE ews beh 394 RE Ss 563 Auto Unlock SE ER EE EE ET EE 30 Master Cylinder Drakes 4 40549 uem HERRIE DE 514 AUtomauc DOGG caaceeewe teas 4 asa 8 HR 30 Memory Feature Memory Seat 192 Child Protechion s ie oon EES Re ose aoe soe d SL MeMOly Seat eu ve os eee erar HAD ER 192 DOOP vive ste Hed a ii ERA oe ee eee 28 Memory Seats and Radio is does dar e Seda 192 Power Door 2229s 3 8 455484658 RD 22 Methanol rererere arire SEA HE ER DE LS 437 Low Tire Pressure System ovx sdce ted ages 425 Mini Trip Computer s2a2sa 2 2 5024205 aos 307 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren MITO os ea x ch
290. iginal color as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles With Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value or a pressure value in a different color 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a mini mum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 435 TPM Te
291. ill sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position from the OFF position NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position e The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables the
292. in driving situations ACC may have detection issues In these cases ACC may brake late or unexpect edly The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene Adding A Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installation of a trailer hitch or if the ACC performance does not return to normal after removing the trailer hitch see your authorized dealer Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly Turns And Bends In turns or bends ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the brakes if necessary Be sure to select an appropriate speed while driving in curves ACC may occasionally provide braking and or a driver alert that you consider unnecessary This may be the system s response to signs guardrails and other station ary objects in a curve This may also occur at the base of steep hills This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Using ACC On Hills Lane Changing When drivin
293. indow demister outlets u NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 NOTE BI LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets e Floor Mode N Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window vel demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions e Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side win dow defrosting and defogging When the defrost mode is selected the blower level may increase NOTE For Manual Climate Controls while operating in other airflow modes than Defrost the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass 13 SYNC Press the Sync soft key to toggle the Sync feature On Off The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature 14 Temperature Control Manual Temperature Control Only Press the temperature soft key to regulate the tempe
294. ine having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufac turer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD 89 800dfab7 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine
295. ine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine RER8ZWYCB4 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 3 6L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended 540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission 3 6L Shell L12108 Transmission Fluid or equivalent Engine Automatic Transmission 5 7L MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed Engine ATF 4 product Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS 11655 such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s API GL 5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent API GL 5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent MOPAR Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44 40 or equivalent MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Mi Maintenance Schedule 542 O Required Maintenance Intervals 543 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 542 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES xe MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Th
296. ing prompt and the following beep say Redial e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Redial N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF NOTE The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth connection It is recommended to press the transfer soft key when leaving the vehicle Uconnect Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep say Call Emergency or Dial Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the touch screen e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The nu
297. ing the locking tab in the disengaged position pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and rearward until it locks in place in the vertical position The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle 061541307 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483 To Reset The Manual Park Release 1 Push the latch at the base of the lever on the rear side rearward away from the lever to unlatch the lever 2 Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and down to its original position until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever 3 Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever is locked in its stowed position 4 Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console Reinstall the console storage bin 484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Towing Wheels OFF the RWD MODELS AWD MODELS oe Ground IF Transmission is operable EM Tow NONE Transmission i in NEUTRAL NOT ALLOWED e 30 mph 48 km h max speed Front e 15 mi 24 km max distance 5 speed trans NOT ALLOWED Wheel Lift mar e 30 mi 48 km max distance 8 speed trans Emma LL Flatbed ALL BESTMETHOD BESTMETHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN equip
298. ingle chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 e Transmission Temperature Warning Light with severe usage such as trailer towing If this run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off This light indicates that the transmission fluid light turns on safely pull over and stop the CAUTION temperature is running hot This may occur vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a f
299. inimum required by law INDEX 568 INDEX M About Your Brakes ABS Anti Lock Brake System Adaptive Cruise Control ACC Cruise Control 220 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 510 lelie Fuel 22a wx 3 ovde seeders bas AE 443 Adding Washer Fluid 2422 656 4055 40 ORE KERR 505 Eddie Eel 424 sean AR DEE REEDE S 438 Adjustable Pedals a4 xxu bee MR RE ges 215 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 498 Air Conditioner Maintenance 501 sur CondiUonIng FIGE s voee esp C 93d eos as 399 902 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 501 502 Air Conditioning System 951 501 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 354 Air Pressure Tires llle 413 Dur Levee onan EE OE RA 54 65 Abas Deployment sos dpex rey MEE IRE SA 66 Airbag Light ouod 846449554 oe SEP 63 69 83 290 Airbag Maintenance ss 2544 6 4 4 6 ER BS d dos ied 68 AIDAS IGS Xm 57 62 65 Airbag Window Side Curtain 58 62 65 Alarm ecu Alarm sse purs ARE ORE rei ES 17 Alarm LENE wastes D 291 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 Alarm Panic 22 lt 4 544644 46 Exo 4 eS ra Ems 22 All Wheel Drive AWD 384 518 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 20 sere ye 393 395 Anti Lock Warning Light 5 em RE 291 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 509 538 Be Geese OE
300. ion but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the
301. ion of the Multi Displacement System MDS Re fer to Multi Displacement System in Starting and Operating for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx id Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filter
302. ion or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263 General Information POWER SUNROOF IF EGUIPPED This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the device 034141878 Power Sunroof Switch e The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met 264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater ri
303. ire Oil Change Due Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Due message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Without pressing the brake pedal push the ENGINE START STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Fuel Economy Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Fuel Economy displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy
304. is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 L of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for brok
305. is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPM
306. ive to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the OFF 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound Touch the Surround Sound soft key to change this dis play This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection press the Surround Sound soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Phone Bluetooth e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch Supplement N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 SIRIUS Setup e Channel Skip SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip Then touch the arrow back soft key e Subscription Info New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with your radio Following the expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Touch the Subscription Info soft key to access the Sub scription Information screen Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider on
307. iving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to 055007576 1 Worn Tire follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure 2 New tre You could lose control and have a collision resulting These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread in serious injury or death grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline 420 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to th
308. l Language Voice Recognition VR engine Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in phrases or complete sentences The system filters out certain non word utterances and sounds such as ah and eh The system handles fill in words such as I would like to The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence such as make a phone call and to Kelly omith For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen tence the system identifies the topic or context and provides the associated follow up prompt such as Who do you want to call in the case where a phone call was requested but the specific name was not recognized The system utilizes continuous dialog when the system requires more information from the user it will ask a question to which the user can respond without pressing the Voice Command button Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the button and say a command or say help All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M You can also press the or buttons when the system is li
309. l cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale 450 STARTING AND OPERATING M Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a
310. l operate for two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding You
311. l settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odors Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Main taining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instructions 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS VERY HOT am Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level 4 and turn on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level with AVC on If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on AVC If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level ji with A C on Adjust Temperature control for comfort COOL
312. lay The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Settings in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status 032737803 Park Assist Ready D 1 fame Let sich Gis iiL 1 Ok i m t 032737807 Park Assist System Off The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one half second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 Slow Tone 032737804 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Fast Tone 032737805 032737806 Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the w
313. lays we 072710829 y Integrated Power Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525 CAUTION Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse e When installing the integrated power module _ cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop Radiator E H erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so eer may allow water to get into the integrated power Power Steering 1 module and possibly result in an electrical system green failure l MEE 2 30 Amp When replacing a blown fuse it is important to Pink use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating Anti ock Pakes The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated EE may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Fuse Spare Fuse Spare Fuse Spare 20 Amp All Wheel Drive Yellow Module If 526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse 10 Amp Security Wiper Motor Red 10 Amp Air Conditioning Rei Clutch Fuse Spare 14 25 Amp Anti Lock Brakes 25 Amp Fuel Pump Natural Natural 15 25 Amp Transmission 15 Amp Transmission Shifter Natural Blue Fuse Spare ME Fuse Spare NE Radiator Fan 2 25 Amp Engine Module EE Power Steering 2 INN mE 11 20 Amp Horns Headlamp Washers Yellow LEN mm MEd Ld ME aa ME MAINTAI
314. le Information Center EVIC dis plays Adaptive Cruise Ready When the system is OFF the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Control Off NOTE You cannot enable ACC under the following conditions e When you apply the brakes e When the parking brake is set e When the automatic transmission is in PARK RE VERSE or NEUTRAL e When pushing the RES button without a previously set speed in memory 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button The ACC menu in the EVIC displays Adaptive Cruise Ready Adaptive Cruise Control Ready 96789 mi 032433097 Adaptive Cruise Control Ready To turn the system OFF push and release the ON OFF button again At this time the system will turn off and the EVIC will display Adaptive Cruise Control Off WARNING Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control ACC system on when not in use is dangerous You could acciden tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Set A Desired ACC Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed 032433098 ACC Set Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal If you do not the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed If this occurs e The message
315. le with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately 508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NEE Id To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam Cooling System age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition WARNING when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis motion connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires You or others can be badly burned by hot engine disconnected or re
316. leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 475 nut has been tightened twice The correct tightness of each lug nut is 110 ft lbs 150 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torgue wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury zm Preparations For Jump Start The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the engine compartment for jump starting 476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE The remote battery
317. line NOTE SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Settings Press the More soft key then press the Settings soft key to display the menu setting screen In this mode the Uconnect Touch system allows you to access program mable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Auto On Comfort amp Remote Start Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time 10 10 68 qs FM 91 7 NW 54 out Settings Display Clock Safety amp Driving Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Aulo On Comlort amp Remote Start Uconnect Touch 8 4 Soft Keys When making a selection press the soft key to enter the desired mode Once in the desired mode press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow soft key to return to the previous menu or press the X soft key to close out of the settings screen Pressing the Up or Down Arrow soft keys on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings Display After pressing the Display soft key the following settings will be available e Display Mode Whe
318. lish 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 561 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service
319. llow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the START STOP button 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The message Push Start Button will display in the EVIC until you push the START button DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent To unlock the rear doors pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward 045635319 Door Lock Knob If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leav
320. lltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses United States 0 4 MRXC4W4MA4 Canada 2546A C4W4MA4 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 6L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800d ab6 line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING Rey METHOD 436 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 5 7L Engine If Equipped This engine is designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded gasol
321. lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death POWER TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The power tilt telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column Power Tilt Telescoping Switch NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 To tilt the steering column move the lever up or down as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the driver s door trim panel to return the tilt telescopic steering column to pre programmed positions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a hea
322. low distribution and amount Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 10 Driver Temperature Control Down Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 11 Driver Temperature Control Up Button Provides the driver with independent temperature con trol Push the button for warmer temperature settings NOTE In Sync mode this button will also automati cally adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time 12 Modes The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets demist outlets and defrost outlets The Mode settings are as follows e Panel Mode gt gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets e Bi Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side w
323. low you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch directly on the desired setting e Speed Adjusted Volume This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed To change the Speed Adjusted Volume touch the Off 1 2 or 3 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Music Info Cleanup This feature helps organize music files for optimized music navigation To make your selection touch the Music Info Cleanup soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key e Surround Sound This feature provides simulated surround sound mode To make your selection touch the Surround Sound soft key select On or Off followed by pressing the arrow back soft key Phone Bluetooth After pressing the Phone Bluetooth soft key the follow ing settings will be available e Paired Devices This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone Bluetooth system For further information refer to the Uconnect Touch Supplement 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SIRIUS Setup After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft key the following settings will be available e Channel Skip SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning To make your selection touch the Channel Skip soft key select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the arrow back soft key
324. mation Center EVIC Displays N EE 298 O EVIC White Telltale Lights 3a a 299 O EVIC Amber Telltale Lights 4425 3 ors 300 H EVIC Red Telltale Lights TOUCHE DUC ies aeyecat es pans os O Fuel ECONOMY 22 9 29459 2 9 cb ex eee oe 305 O Vehicle Speed a 40 ga PERD 5 4 UR PER N d 306 VED MO AAR RE EE EE EE ON 307 E NIS 2o wen v oes 548 DE ERA SE RR 308 O Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 308 Fi WlessaGes T PEE MD ET 309 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M G Tare da OAAR N ST ET FEE OT 309 Bl Uconnect Touch Settings 309 A Hard Keys APP 309 Hi DIER ers d 309 D Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch 4 3 Settings 310 D Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Settings 323 N iPod USB MP3 Control If Equipped 338 ll Harman Kardon Logic7 High Performance Multichannel Surround Sound System With Driver Selectable Surround DSS If EUDP ede eacee eame ran 399 ll Steering Wheel Audio Controls If Equipped i 2 sep ES tenes 340 O Radio Operation 04 341 HEL aver ss tyes ons 99 ab eee aa 341 Mi CD DVD Disc Maintenance 342 ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 342 W Climate Controls 04 343 Heneral OE IE e C9 domin e VER tore WE 343 O Climate Control Functions 350 DO Automatic Temperature Control ATC
325. maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 downloaded names can be used Until then if avail 2 After loading the mobile phonebook select phone able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail book from the Phone main screen then select the appro able for use priate number Touch the next to the selected number to display the options pop up In the pop up select Add to e Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile Favorites phone is accessible 68 qf FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Ww 72 e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or 4e Phonebook Mobile Contact DI deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be isn edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans o Add to Favorites ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next x eee phone connection E E 246 456 7891 Win 248 577 6215 Managing Your Favorite Phonebook There are three ways you can add an entry to your Favorite Phonebook 1 During an active call of a number to make a favorite touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone main screen NOTE If the Favorites list is full you will be asked to remove an existing favorite 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 F
326. mber dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your NOTE chances of successfully making a phone call as to that e The towing assistance call may also be initiated by for the mobile phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and connected to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the mobile phone has network coverage and stays connected to the Uconnect Phone touch The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the button to begin e After the Listening prompt and the following beep Working With Automated Systems say Towing Assistance This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system NN UNDERSTANDING T
327. me of the worst injuries happen when people are outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility in these areas are more likely to be seriously of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the injured or killed inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should Do not allow people to ride in any area of your be belted at all times vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Lap Shoulder Belts belts l EM All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and lap shoulder belts using a seat belt properly Continued The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and belts are designed to go around the large bones of adjust the front seat your body These are the strongest parts of your 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat body and can take the forces of an accident best Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt your injurie
328. ment designed for the purpose following equip position not the ACC position ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485 If the vehicle s battery is discharged see Shift Lever Flatbed towing is recommended DO NOT tow an AWD Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instruc vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK position for towing If the transmission is operable vehicles WITHOUT AWD may be towed with rear wheels on the ground under CAUTION the following conditions e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL e Do not use sling type equipment when towing Damage to the fascia will occur e The vehicle towing speed must not exceed 30 mph When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do 48 km h not attach to the front or rear suspension compo e The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles 24 km nents Damage to your vehicle may result from for 5 speed transmission or 30 miles 48 km for 8 speed transmission improper towing Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result e The manufacturer does not recommend that you
329. ment panel Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings i e 30 60 90 press the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting i e ON OFF Soft Keys Soft Keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch screen 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Customer Programmable Features Uconnect Touch 4 3 Settings In this mode the Uconnect Touch system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display Clock Safety Assistance Lights Doors amp Locks Heated Seats Engine Off Operation Compass Settings Audio Phone Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup through hard keys and soft keys NOTE Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time Press the Settings hard key to access the Settings screen use the Page Up Down soft keys to scroll through the following settings Touch the desired setting soft key to change the setting using the description shown on the following pages for each setting 044336083 1 Uconnect Touch 4 3 Settings Hard Key Settings Display Clock i Please selecta setting Safety Assistance Exit Lights Uconnect Touch 4 3 Soft Keys Display e Brightness Touch the Brightness soft key to change this display When in this display you may select display brightness with the headlights on and the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by UND
330. merican Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operat
331. moved such as when diagnostic coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If testing or for prolonged periods during very rough you see or hear steam coming from under the idle or malfunctioning operating conditions hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509 Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling Syst
332. must be used CAUTION e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position Front Power Outlet WARNING Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result 268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The center console outlet is powered directly from the There is also a 12 volt power outlet located on the back of battery power available at all times Items plugged into the center console for rear passengers This power outlet this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the has power available only when the ignition is placed in engine from starting the ACC or RUN position Center Console Power Outlet Rear Center Console Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted in
333. n Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 6 approximate grade or greater hill e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle 400 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued e HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a HSA Off hill and this could cause a collision with another Jf you wish to turn off the HSA s
334. n in this display you may select one of the auto display settings To change Mode status touch and release the Day Night or Auto soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 e Display Brightness With Headlights ON When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights on Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Display Brightness With Headlights OFF When in this display you may select the brightness with the headlights off Adjust the brightness with the and setting soft keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the and soft keys Then touch the arrow back soft key e Set Language When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Touch the Set Language soft key and then touch the desired language soft key until a check mark appears next to the language showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Units When in this display you may select to have the EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped changed between US and Metric units of measure Touch US or Metric until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected T
335. n is also used to access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command features if your vehicle is equipped Please see the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on how to use the button The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts There are two general meth ods for how Voice Command works 1 Say compound commands like Call John Smith mo bile 2 Say the individual commands and allow the system to guide you to complete the task You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Listen prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Call and then John Smith and then mobile the following com pound command can be said Call John Smith mo bile e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound command form of the voice command is
336. n the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label etc 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side 047440819 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during WARNING Continued e If your vehicle
337. n your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it ln addition there are tether strap anchorages sy behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material Then rotate the tether anchor age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downw
338. nals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags SAB Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to h
339. nce a 4e EE dore dried dO s 266 N INDEX 585 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag OF JCS ETE eset eee tases eee es 85 412 565 oway Control Trailer a sek E eh HEER ee d 450 Adine Lile of les issue PRE bes een 419 Oy EGCG Eie OI sa sad eae a os ee RR HOER 497 AE MERE EER de db oe 412 System Remote BENE 40408 srame Pe EER RR DE 25 COONS Tm 421 CONECO 44754 604 oo de X92 Bee BA 465 469 green T 286 Compact Pale 445 6444 quercus obse SR SER S 416 Telescoping Steering Column 211212 Flat Eli IE ie nee WS HEKS SEED A65 Temperature Control Automatic ATC o General Information 412 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 294 465 Te Speed tne a Hace eae AU eke ee oe eu 415 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 74 Inflation Pressures seen 413 Ther dam POPE Alarm eco 49 ewes a om E 17 Jack es uw ea eo bee EE N 468 469 Theft System Security Alarm 17 Lleol IES Amr 419 Tt Steering CONN e dua ce so aaia a a aa 211212 be MD gees ss 408 409 Tune Delay Headlight 422 esos Rue ER Rn 200 Pressure Monitor System IPMS 425 Tire and Loading Information Placard 408 Pressure Warning LIGht 45502244448 eee 287 Tire Identification Number TIN 406 Quay GAE 2 243 95 EES BR 2354 eens 565 Tie Marines 4225450454044 REEKS REEDE d 403 dial segir aSee DEERE te eee ee es 415 Tre Salety IntoEDUSL ORE vx cb pac PESE KERE PRE 403 kele 23 03
340. nd remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To change the Illuminated Approach status touch the 0 30 60 or 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Headlights With Wipers Touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key to change this display When this feature is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Auto High Beams Touch the Auto High Beams soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights Touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key and select
341. ne of two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee To program your RKE transmitters perform the follow ing 1 Remove the Key Fob from the ignition or change the ignition to OFF for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go 2 Select desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Once the profile has been recalled press and release the SET S button on the memory switch then press and release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the SET S button followed by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will display in the EVIC if equipped To recall the memory settings for driver 1 press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver 2 press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 N UNDERSTA
342. ng Uconnect Hands Free Calling The commands can be spoken from any screen gfier pushing tha connect Phones ation te on be Available commands while phone call is in progress steerina wheel g The canere csi bic spoken ah HY gaton while s GM e ve iie tushla Vie Leona vors conimend bulion to pn the steering whsel Shows Ihe Number Last Last associated number incoming wall list will geh a JO SEM Number ia Dial Tones for wth entry i5 called is call is seh Metn try dialed numbers stored In dialed redialed dialed ie SHOWN Smith with al for 1234 F Voiceniall stored are sent Password are numbers sarit 030863306 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 NOTE You can replace John Smith with any name in your mobile or favorite phone book You can also say Send a message to John Smith and the system will ask you which phone number you want to send a message to If your phone does not support phonebook download or call log download over Bluetooth than these com mands will return a response that the contact does not exist in the phonebook Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and for John Smith underlined in the gray shaded boxes e You can replace Mobile with Home Work or Other General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e You can
343. ng button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the EVIC displays CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code Step 2 and follow all remain ing steps 260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after several seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two s
344. ng calls Show Outgoing calls Show missed Calls Show Recent Calls e Searching Contacts phone number Search for John Smith Mobile Screen Activated Features e Dialing via Keypad using touch screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touch screen e Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen e Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs e Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 e Sending a text message via the touch screen e Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen e Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly NOTE Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used
345. ng capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system fail ure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515 Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re WARNING Continued fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that WARNING has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your V
346. nge the engine oil and engine oil filter JJ Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 182 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter J Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Police Car Only Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for J Flush and replace the engine coolant at damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 553 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 90 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule H Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs
347. nition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 15 Sport Mode If Equipped This light will illuminate when the sport mode sport is selected This mode provides performance based tuning For further information refer to Sport Mode in Starting And Operating 16 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi E mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 17 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped a This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con e trol ESC is off OFF 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 18 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the br
348. normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Change Axle Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519 Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain ma
349. nt calls soft key on the Phone main screen You can also press the button and say Show my incom ing calls from any screen and the Incoming calls will be displayed NOTE Incoming can also be replaced with Outgoing Recent or Missed Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the button to accept the call To ignore the call touch the Ignore soft key on the touch screen You can also touch the answer soft key or touch the blue caller ID box Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the phone button answer soft key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or
350. ntinue to NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should never install LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts LATCH Anchorages Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system e ls meets the seatback and are located just below the button with the anchorage symbol on the rear seat but are not visible You will easily feel them if you ru
351. ntrol Mode In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode a normal fixed speed Cruise Control mode is available for cruis ing at fixed speeds The normal Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requir ing the driver to operate the accelerator Cruise Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h To change modes press the MODE button when the system is in either the OFF READY or SET position Cruise Ready will be displayed if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position Cruise Off will be N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 displayed if the system was in the ACC OFF position To switch back to Adaptive Cruise Control mode press the MODE button a second time WARNING In the normal Cruise Control mode the system will not react to vehicles ahead In addition the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle to vehicle distance is detected Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead Always be aware which mode is selected To Set A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press the SET button and release The EVIC will display the set speed NOTE You must observe the display when setting or changing speed not the speedometer To Vary The Speed Setting
352. o check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four TPM sensors e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare tire when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings IN The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display a LOW TIRE message and a graphic showing the pres sure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing or changing color STARTING AND OPERATING 431 AAR C X WE decenas mW k E CESAR EF T Hosen a mi 819793fc 432 STARTING AND OPERATING Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition those flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold pl
353. obile Screen Activated Features Dialing via Keypad using touch screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis played on the touch screen Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the touch screen Pairing up to 10 phones audio devices for easy access to connect to them quickly For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites www chrysler com uconnect www dodge com uconnect www jeep com uconnect or call 1 877 855 8400 If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technolog
354. of injury in an accident Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 022635326 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger 2 Knee Bolster Advanced Front Air Bags 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag NOTE These air bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advance
355. of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 455 Towing Requirements WARNING To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom Improper towing can lead to an injury collision mended Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing CAUTION e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles and it will not shift during travel When trailering 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts axle or other parts could be damaged can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a have a collision trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear
356. ogramming HomeLink O Programming A Rolling Code O Programming A Non Rolling Code O Canadian Gate Operator Programming O Using Homelink 22953 eee EPEC ily fa wee 909 e DUREE ERE eee d 2 EL Troubleshooting Tips amp si as ske ne EER EER O General Information 253 W Power Sunroof If Equipped 263 O Opening Sunroof Express 264 D Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 264 B Closing Sunroof Express 264 B Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 265 Ei Pine Protect Feature edu ua e 265 O Venting Sunroof Express 265 O Sunshade Operation xad d e es 265 El Wind Bulete 2c ctn ae rrap RE aes 265 O Sunroof Maintenance 4 sug hear KERR ED 266 G Ignition Off Operation 0 266 O Sunroor Fully Closed d vo v dro ter vues 266 B Electrical Power Outlets 266 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 EM opholder esas EER RARR S RA HR ER EE 270 HLDOOFSIDIMBO sevas ESE EDELE NEW AA 276 Hi Froiit Seat Cupholder as s o oa ri PER RS 270 O Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped With 60 40 O Rear Seat Cupholders sss 273 Split Folding Rear Seat ses EE n en 276 ke PP m 274 M Rear Window Features 00ers erases O Glovebox Storage s s sagre wee 3435 s o74 HRear Window Detroster W Load Leveling System If Equipped 279 O Console Features 274 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICL
357. on a second time Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM IF EGUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS B Instrument Panel Features 283 Mi Instrument Cluster 284 B Instrument Cluster Premium 285 W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 286 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 296 D Electronic Vehicle Infor
358. on to the ON RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 CAUTION Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a se
359. onnect Phone on the next phone connection Emergency And Towing Assistance The 911 Help numbers can only be altered These can not be deleted or the names can not be changed To change the 911 Help number follow these steps e Touch the phonebook soft key from the Phone main screen e Touch the 911 Help soft key Touch the appropriate listing to alter Emergency for example e Once Emergency is touched the Edit soft key appears Touch the Edit soft key and you will be given the choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default e Follow the on screen prompts to complete the task Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Ways To Initiate A Phone Call Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call with Uconnect Phone NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 e Redial Call By Saying A Phonebook Name e Dial by touching in the number e Press the button to begin e Voice Commands Dial by Saying a Number Call by e After the Listening prompt and the following beep Saying a Phonebook Name Redial or Call Back say Call John Doe Mobile e Mobile Phonebook e The Uconnect
360. onvex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Outside mirrors are hinged allowing the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Outside Mirrors Approach Light If Equipped Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with approach lighting contain one LED which is located in the upper outboard mirror glass corner The approach light supplies illuminated entry lighting which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open any door This LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles It also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of the doors Tilt Mirrors In Reverse If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver s view of the ground rearward of the front doors The outside mirror
361. oolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visu
362. oplaning The capa bilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability 396 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Brake Assist System BAS WARNING This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics neuvers This system detects an emergency braking situ from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This BAS cannot prevent collisions including those re can help reduce braking distances sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping se
363. or trim panel The switch consists of three buttons The S button which is used to activate the memory save function and the 1 and 2 buttons which are used to recall either of two pre programmed memory profiles mm Jo ip 031036877 Memory Seat Switches N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 Programming The Memory Feature NOTE Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory To create a new memory profile perform the following 1 Place the ignition into the RUN position 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer ences ie seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped power tilt and telescopic steering column if equipped and radio station presets 3 Press and release the SET S button on the memory switch 4 Within five seconds press and release the MEMORY button 1 or 2 The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped will display which memory position has been set NOTE e Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile e The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall o
364. or Lights 207 Daytime Running Lights 004 400 days Hs es 201 Dealer SCV 4 042 gee Gah ip ae eee poe ees 493 Deck Lid Emergency Release s 2x 68 duties s 41 Deck Lid Power Release 0 0 39 Defroster Rear Window 278 Defroster Windshield 84 349 Delay Intermittent Wipers su ode eg eee x eae 208 Diagnostic System Onboard vs BEE ER RE 491 Dimmer Switch Headlight s uique em WERE s 203 Dipsticks OM deal sas ap ee ean ean oe a ae oo 495 Disabled Vehicle Towing 04 484 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 21000 EER RR 512 Engine Ed gebie biases ER Door LOCKS v 29 oos eu shou yy AAS oes SS Door Locks Automatic 572 INDEX M Door Opener Garage Driving On Slippery Surfaces Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy E 85 Fuel Electric Rear Window Defrost Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Brake Control System Anti Lock Brake System Brake Assist System Traction Control System Electronic Power Distribution Center Fuses Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Control ESC px wb 220 397 Electronic Vehicle Information Center ENG ea Ee ee segue ates eae ees 251 296 Emergency Deck Lid Release lt s0scacsedwesa ds 41 Emergency Trunk Release usse Ree 41 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 47
365. or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces e If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi cause that destroys the paint and protective coating 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The paint and decals cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521 e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion e To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage t
366. or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a LOW FUEL message This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Miles Per Gallon MPG The Miles Per Gallon MPG feature displays instanta neous fuel economy in a bar graph below the DTE this function cannot be reset Press the BACK button to return to the main menu Vehicle Speed Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Speed displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the SELECT button to display the NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 current speed in mph or km h Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km h NOTE Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC Trip Info Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Trip Info displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press and release the UP DOWN but tons until one of the following Trip functions displays in the EVIC e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the UP DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer
367. ors It only functions when the windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode it does not function in the intermittent mode When Rain Brake Support is active there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation 402 STARTING AND OPERATING Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC
368. ort as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC i 12D481 126 AC 3rd Edition Printed in U S A
369. ou may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Pauses wait or other characters that are supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial ing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking There are 2 numbers with the name John Say the full name you could press the button and say John Smith to select that option with out having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length e Touch the More soft key then touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to show your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for netwo
370. ouch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Voice Response Length When in this display you may change the Voice Re sponse Length settings Io change the Voice Response Length touch the Brief or Detailed soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Touchscreen Beep When in this display you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster When this feature is selected the turn by turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route To make your selection touch the Navigation Turn By Turn In Cluster soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Fuel Saver Display In Cluster The ECO message is located in the instrument cluster display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selecte
371. ould affect the performance of ParkSense e When you turn ParkSense off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF Furthermore once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the EVIC will display PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects such as bicycle carriers trailer hitches etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE PARK ASSIST message to be displayed in the EVIC CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small ob stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected
372. our satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 560 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 423 6343 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 Eng
373. peaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some e Audio quality is maximized under Far End Audio Performance e When navigating through an automated system such e low to medium blower setting as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of ids low to medium vehicle speed speaking the digit string make sure to say Send ar uc dc VEE a NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 e low road noise Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the e smooth road surface Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection e fully closed windows can generally be reestablished by switching the phone OFF ON Your cellular phone is recommended to remain e dry weather conditions and in Bluetooth ON mode mm e operation from the driver s seat Power Up e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the to a large degree rely on the phone and network and ON or ACC position or after a language change you not the Uconnect Phone must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e n a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Memm Voice Tree Uconnect Hands Free Calli
374. phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M progress Or you can place a call on hold by touching the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen then dial a number from the dialpad recent calls SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks To go back to the first call refer to Togeling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Join Calls in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold During an active call touch the Hold soft key on the Phone main screen Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Swap soft key on the Phone main screen Only one call can be placed on hold at a time You can also press the button to toggle between the active and held phone call Join Calls When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold touch the Join Calls soft key on the Phone main screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the button or the end soft key Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent Redial e Press the Redial soft key e or press the and after the Listen
375. plemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of the air bag NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events th
376. pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued 466 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Continued Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You cover in the trunk Follow these steps to access the jack could be crushed Never put any part of your body and spare tire under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get NOTE The spare tire must be removed in order to under a raised vehicle take it to a service center access the jack where it can be raised on a lift 1 Open the trunk Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack 2 Lift the access cover using the pull strap The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 467 a Opening The Access Panel Spare Tire Fastener 3 Remove the fastener securing the spare tire 4 Remove the spare tire 468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5 Remove the
377. position to allow the climate control to either warm or cool the vehicle Hard key The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting The blower speed decreases as you turn the knob counter clockwise Soft key Uconnect Touch System 4 3 Press the blower soft key to enter the blower setting screen Once in the blower settings screen use the UP and DOWN arrows to adjust the blower speed setting or directly select the speed setting by pressing the blower bar area around the blower icon The blower speed increases as you press the UP arrow or move clockwise on the setting scale and decreases when press the DOWN arrow or move counter clockwise on the setting scale Soft key Uconnect Touch System 8 4 Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons 4 Front Defrost Button Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this fea ture is ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode if equipped The blower speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 5 Rear Defrost Button Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mi
378. pply the parking brake Continued When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine off When the ignition is in the OFF position the shift lever is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against unwanted movement fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children s
379. pportunity 418 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires Tire Spinning to help you in determining when your tires should be When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not replaced spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck STARTING AND OPERATING 419 Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Dr
380. qub epe EA ESSE ee zu 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key si sae xe rb xe 15 intant Restraint uses ack Hae oek ORR 70 71 Information Center Vehicle aa aana 296 Inside Rearview Mirror suis ez cr rere DR AE xs 94 Instrument Cluster leeren 284 286 Instrument Panel and Controls iv esce eye 283 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 529 Integrated Power Module Fuses 524 Interior Appearance Care rs bush ae xta rimis 927 ig veels die EA EE IE atone E RS eee 524 merno LENG osse WEE EDS AAR 838 dct 205 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 208 OE o or nis sy i chs enews bees ae bee oS 4 Jacke LoCAHOll 43 4434 4665 50 5h 2s 654465485 466 Jack ODeIAUON a 45 514 549 RSS HAP ASe Ghee ee 469 N INDEX 577 Jacking INSUMICHONS x 25958 vibat 9E 9 se gee PRES 469 JUMP EERS eek SPAR ERA DAE bate be d 475 Kevin Reminder as ne MERE MR RS Poncio DRS oes 14 ke do Eve d est a robur a dede ae EN 17 Key Replacement 2 uie sceosonig He RR eskidan 16 Key Sentry immobilizer 2 932 93 AS WER ges 15 Keyless Enter N Go seres 32 361 keyless Enty Oys auque stes Hewes E Gaya aw s 20 Xu ItoP A PCTPETT 12 INCVS Su gua da 64 PTT 12 Kicker Sound System sies uie REK ES HEER as 339 Iur sn DWS OAR on Hi RE N es de 54 Lane Change and Turn Signals 202 Lane Change Assist i229 VERKEER RA GE N ai 203 Lap Snouider Bells soes ie EERS RE tria Ehi 43 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
381. quence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated NS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 397 Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent col lisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent
382. r 90 soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Engine Off Power Delay Touch the Engine Off Power Delay soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature To change the Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds 45 seconds 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key Compass Settings e Variance Touch the Variance soft key to change this display Com pass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differ ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the dif ferences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Mobile Phones Laptops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map e Calibration Touch the Calibration soft key to change this setting This comp
383. r Instrument Panel for further information Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Setting 4 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high speed position e The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions e Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper swit
384. r any mixture of these two For best results a refueling pattern that alternates between E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full e you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling e you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed 442 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer re quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains a
385. r for service e Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor including transparent material or aftermarket grilles Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present the system will return to the Adaptive Cruise Control Off state and will resume function by simply reactivating it NOTE Installing a vehicle front end protector or an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recom mended Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions ACC will be temporarily unavailable If this occurs try activating ACC again later following a key cycle If the problem persists see your authorized dealer 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Service ACC Warning If the system turns off and the EVIC displays ACC FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor it indicates there is an internal system fault Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions have the system checked by an authorized dealer ACG FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor 56789 mi 032433104 ACC FCW Unavailable Warning Precautions While Driving With ACC In certa
386. r information 22 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster
387. r satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 N DEERE EEA ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATER IN FUEL REAR ABNDOW WINOSME D WIPER EXTERION PULS AKH BEAM TURN SIGMALS 3 oy pe ELECTRON PROGRAM BRAKE WEER INTERMITTENT FAILURE EPEED CONTROL ay eg 5s on ZO e oO 1 FUEL REAR WINDOW WWDSHELO MASTER LIGHTING Seen UPPER AO LOWER HEATED BEAT WINDOW LIFT VRE PRESEURE WEL BERENT wisi ARINC WTERMETTENT WIPER WASHER Serr HIGH eee sore C KR a 0575aJ52 93 29 LI FUEL FILL SEE FEAR WINDOW WDSHIELD WASHER DUWE LIGHT FRONT POS UGNT HOOO RELEASE LOWER fun ALL WHEEL HARMSE OF AM LUR WASHER FLUID LEVEL DOW DONN Eoo roe MI DAWE ERAXING SYSTEM Y 200 QE ET fe JA awo BRAKE me UFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC ERANE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW CLOCTRICALL PAIK LIGHTS KLAR FOG LAMP AND LIFTGATE UESMUSI AND VENTLATWEFAN WW OW LOCH THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WATS PARKING DEFRIIST HEATED GEN LOWER AR QUTLET CONTROL D
388. ra ture of the air inside the passenger compartment Moving the temperature bar into the red area indicates warmer temperatures Moving the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Climate Control Functions A C Air Conditioning The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the air conditioning system is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin For improved fuel economy press the A C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings NOTE e For Manual Climate Controls if the system is in Mix Floor or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser lo cated in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or GS high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired
389. radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Key Fob with Remote x2 Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob P may reduce this range How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Trunk closed e HAZARD switch off e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Battery at an acceptable charge level 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e RKE PANIC button not pressed e System not disabled from previous remote start event Vehicle theft alarm not active Ignition in OFF position WARNING e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Eq
390. ransmission gear state is also indicated in the display in the shift knob The shift lever is spring loaded and returns to a home position when it is released To select a gear range press the lock button on the shift lever ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 and move the lever rearward or forward You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of the PARK position refer to Brake Transmission Shift Inter lock System in this section To shift past multiple gear ranges at once such as PARK to DRIVE move the lever past the first or second detent Select the DRIVE range for normal driving The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears Standard Shifter The standard shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and LOW shift positions Using the LOW position manually downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed Optional Shifter With AutoStick The optional shift lever with AutoStick shift paddles mounted on the
391. rd is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution NS TA TING AND OPERATING 365 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed _ Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU neuen TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK 366 START
392. re the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears The transmission shift lever has only PARK REVERSE NEUTRAL and DRIVE shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section Moving the shift lever to the left or right while in the DRIVE position will manually select the transmission gear and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 4 3 2 1 Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi
393. re the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 393 CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude
394. re the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bum per stickers bicycle racks etc The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible chime alert and reducing the radio volume Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points side rear front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle Side Monitoring 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light will not illuminate R
395. re to clear all objects from the window before closing Reset Auto Up Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the DOWN position To enable the window controls press and release the window lockout button again setting it in the UP position NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 021935321 Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the
396. re tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 414 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation press
397. replace Incoming Calls with Outgoing Calls or Missed Calls e Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect system is equipped with this feature and the mobile phone supports messaging over Bluetooth e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e You can replace 248 555 1212 with any phone number supported by your Mobile phone e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation e You can replace 4 with any message number shown on the screen 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Uconnect Phone 8 4 8 4N Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 Nav Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone Uconnect Phone supports the following features Voice Activated Features e Hands Free dialing via Voice Call John Smiths Mo bile or Dial 248 555 1212 e Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming SMS messages e Hands Free text messaging Send a message to John Smiths Mobile e Redialing last dialed numbers Redial e Calling Back the last incoming call number Call Back e View Call logs on screen Show incomi
398. riod on dry pave ment Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufac turer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture NS TA TING AND OPERATING 423 NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instruc tions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires can be identified by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating
399. rk signal strength and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect
400. rning If Equipped Touch the Front Collision Warning soft key to change this display The Front Collision Warning FCW feature can be can be set to Far set to Near or turned Off The default status of FCW is the Far setting This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away This gives you the most reaction time To change the setting for more dynamic driving select the Near setting This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you This allows for a more dynamic driving experience To change the FCW status press and release the OFF Near or Far button Then touch the arrow back soft key For further information refer to Adaptive Cruise Con trol ACC in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle e Park Assist Touch the Park Assist soft key to change this display The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF To change the Park Assist status press and release the OFF Sound Only or Sounds and Display soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Refer to ParkSense Rear Park Assist in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle for system function an
401. rom the Phone main screen select phonebook From the phonebook screen select the Favorites soft key and then select the soft key located to the right of the phonebook record Select an empty entry and touch the on that selected entry When the Options pop up appears touch Add from Mobile You will then be asked which contact and number to choose from your mobile phone book When complete the new favorite will be shown 68 af FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 out Wo 72 Phonebook gt Voicemail Add from Mobile Empty ma Mom s Cell To Remove A Favorite e To remove a Favorite select phonebook from the Phone main screen e Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and then touch the Options soft key NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 e Touch the next to the Favorite you would like to Emergency And Towing Assistance remove The Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can only 68A FM 917 VOEG NG WAS Sor Wei be altered These cannot be deleted and the names cannot Phonebook gt Favorite eae be changed M Voel N To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these BE steps E Buddy s Pizza e Touch the Phonebook soft key from the Phone main F Mom s Cell screen e Touch the Favorites soft key Next scroll to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Favorites e Touch the Options soft key e The Options pop up will display touch
402. ront Of Vehicle and the system will deactivate The Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas i e tunnels with reflective tiles or ice and snow The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas Under rare conditions when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur Clean Radar Sensor in Front of Vehicle FCW OFF 032433103 Clean Radar Sensor Warning NOTE If the ACC Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle warning is active Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available For additional information refer to Normal Fixed Speed Cruise Control Mode in this section N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 If weather conditions are not a factor the driver should examine the sensor It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille To keep the ACC System operating properly it is impor tant to note the following maintenance items e Always keep the sensor clean Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens e Do not remove any screws from the sensor Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment e If the sensor is damaged due to a collision see your authorized deale
403. rrors if equipped NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 6 Passenger Temperature Control Up Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for warmer temperature set tings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 7 Passenger Temperature Control Down Button Provides the passenger with independent temperature control Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync 8 Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON OFF 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 9 AUTO Operation Button If Equipped Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airf
404. rs Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will tum off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature NOTE The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view NOTE e The SmartBeam system can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is replaced the SmartBeam mirror mu
405. rs before filter 80 000 miles 130 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 72 000 miles 117 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the CV joints Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104 000 miles 169 000 km whichever Inspect exhaust system comes first Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary front axle fluid All Wheel Drive Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for AWD damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 550 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Serv
406. rs that are supported by some phones are not supported over Bluetooth These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial ing a numbered sequence Barge In Overriding Prompts The button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking There are 2 numbers with 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M the name John Say the full name you could press the button and say John Smith to select that option with out having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Voice Response Length It is possible for you to choose between Brief and Detailed Voice Response Length e Touch the More hard key then touch the Settings soft key e Touch the Display soft key then scroll down to Voice Response Length e Select either Brief or Detailed by touching the box next to the selection A check mark will appear to show your selection Phone And Network Status Indicators Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength and phone battery strength Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exerci
407. s Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE e Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur e Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will automati cally adjust the climate contro
408. s will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir rors in Reverse position NOTE e The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 e Refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel 030434975 Power Mirror Control The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but tons and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press either the L left or R right to select the mirror that you want to adjust NOTE A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
409. s 403 D Limited Use Spare If Equipped 417 O Tire Identification Number TIN 406 ED SANG vina Gh eh eye bee ee a ee 418 O Tire Terminology And Definitions 407 oO Tread Wear Indicators 4 x ad PRES ds 418 H Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 408 Bite DE DS waas Ge ORR ees eee kes la Tires General Information 412 O Replacement Tires b Te Presse sive asueeeen sees eases 21 N ite Chains 2 gtseeeseen eases DS RR OR O Tire Inflation Pressures 25 W Siow Tres MERE EE OE RE RE 423 O Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 415 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 423 aARadial Cly Ties nate oan HR Obed ae Die 415 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 425 O Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire ELDOSe Oy sel vi ios d Soap sae dees eens 427 And Wheel If Equipped ass ash rem mns 415 D Premium System If Equipped 430 358 STARTING AND OPERATING M O General Information 435 W Flexible Fuel 3 6L Engine Only N Fuel Requirements 00 435 ae i 53 6L Engine If Equipped 435 O E 85 General Information 440 157L Engine If Equipped 436 D Ethanol Fuel E 85 llle 441 O Reformulated Gasoline 436 a N Pare Hu B Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 437 enini E ene ed Re AM D E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles m anu MC 442
410. s MED AA T9 495 E Engine QU Biter san 2 cisne oa EER N 498 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter 914 ca es a4 a4 os 498 O Maintenance Eree Battery viva dar Rs 499 O Air Conditioner Maintenance 501 O A C Air Filler een D Body Lubrication o Windshield Wiper Blades 504 B Adding Washer Fluid 0 505 HExhaust5ystel 12 934 442 ketier 506 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M EL OOIE SIE seep Sete ce tae ete ue es 508 Elri es SIC 44 lt 4 5 dotes ce gach aie oy DR DI 514 D Automatic Transmission 516 o All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 518 Hd Read de sis ues o 35 ERROR ware BGs E 518 D Appearance Care And Protection From GOOSEN Gers ad pod eee sock EIE OER eae 519 fuc ng ORE EE aoe OE EE IE 524 O Integrated Power Module 524 O Rear Power Distribution Center 528 I Vehicle Storage a ue SR RAS REED RR Gees 539 W Replacement Bulbs 533 B Bulb Replacement 4 534 O Front Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp And Side Marker Lamp Models With Halogen Headlamps Im 534 D Front Low Beam Headlamp And Park Turn Lamp Models With High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID 535 A BackUp amps 2205565 094 GEDEK ee 55 536 E DICONSe Lamp si aie oe ye cs irisi aasi 937 NM Fluid Capacities cosses xara SN ds 538 N Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 539 GPN DC 4 EER EE
411. s are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter To make your selection touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sound Horn With Remote Start Touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the horn will sound when the remote start is activated To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sound Horn With Lock Touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft key to change this display When this feature is selected the horn will chirp when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter To make your selection touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Remote Door Unlock Order Touch the Remote Door Unlock Order soft key to change this display When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When Unlock All Doors On Ist Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button
412. s deliver ing substantial increases in component and system effi ciency levels The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge high efficiency amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power supply and drives a 7 5 channel playback architecture The Harman Kardon audio system offers the ability to choose Logic 7 surround sound for any audio source The GreenEdge high efficiency speaker designs ensure the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in dy namic sound quality The speakers are tuned for maxi mum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplifier output stage ensuring state of the art multi seat surround sound processing Logic7 multichannel surround sound technology deliv ers an immersive accurate sound stage to every seating position This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or dashboard AUX input and is activated through the Uconnect Touch System Refer to Surround Sound under Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument Panel 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Selecting Audio Surround through the DSS modes activates the Harman Kardon Logic7 multichannel surround sound technology in your vehicle The Video Surround mode is described under Driver Selectable Surround DSS The Video Surround Mode will only be available for video media sources DVDs Video CDs or other video media supported by the radio Some au
413. s from two to one indicating the change The LO level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes Ventilated Seats If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw air from the seat surface through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient tempera tures The ventilated seats can be operated using the Uconnect Touch System Front Ventilated Seat Operation Uconnect Touch 8 4 8 4 Nav Press the Controls soft key located on the bottom of the Uconnect Touch display 10 10 NW 54 ou 4130 E gt pd px photo H3 audio Controls Soft Key Press the Driver or Passenger seat soft key once to select HI level ventilation Press the soft key a second time to select LO level ventilation Press the soft key a third time to shut off the seat ventilation W FM 91 7 Controle Driver Passenger 7 Ms dk unshe joe We Ven vA j E Screen OFF Ventilated Seats Soft Keys UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipp
414. s held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See Front Map Reading Lights Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either side of the console These buttons are backlit for night time visibility To turn the lights off press the switch a second time The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE is pressed The front map reading lights are mounted in the over head console 031433150 Front Map Reading Lights 031433151 Front Map Reading Light Switches UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 Ambient Light Interior Lights The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The interior lights come on when a door is opened feature This light casts illumination for improved visibil ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch ay 4 L Te i E ese 033333449 Ambient Light 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Dimmer Controls With
415. s in an accident much worse You go around your lap might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Pulling Out The Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING WARNING Continued e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as stron
416. s open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters If one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out side the vehicle the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle To Enter The Trunk With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft 1 5 m of the deck lid press the button on the right side of CHMSL Center High Mounted Stop Light which is located on the deck lid NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 To Lock The Vehicle s Doors With one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft 1 5 m of the driver or passenger front door handles press the door handle LOCK button to lock both doors 021840110 CHMSL Button NOTE If you inadvertently leave your vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless another one of the vehicle s Passive Entry RKE transmit ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft 1 5 m of the Outside Door Handle Lock Button deck lid 021836568 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTIN
417. s should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery Location MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499 81342982 500 MAINTAININ
418. s that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate NS TA TING AND OPERATING 449 NOTE e Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWKRs e Refer to the Tire Placard for your vehicle s proper tire pressure TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of al
419. se caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone simply touch the Mute button on the Phone main screen Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Transfer button on the Phone main screen Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone If you would like to connect or disconnect
420. se deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper other than that recommended by the manufacturer maintenance intervals will require more frequent fluid and filter If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu fluid and filter should be changed ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information Continued 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and front differential The exterior surface of these compo nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible The transfer case fluid fill inspection plug is located in the middle of the rear housing To inspect the transfer case fluid level remove the fill inspection plug The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole Use this plug to add fluid as required The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment To inspect the differ ential fluid level remove the fill plug The fluid level should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole Fluid Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Rear Axle For
421. sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 40 000 miles 65 000 km Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive AWD change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 547 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 56 000 miles 91 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U
422. signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you POWER STEERING Your vehicle is equipped with an electro hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electro hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from provi
423. sk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265 position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any rele
424. soline 2 0 000 cee eee 436 Cleaning Wheels ue suus EO SEE SE AT ES 521 Windshield Wiper Blades 504 Climate Control usu eae sacr Sure x Oed AAS 343 Coin ml so 3h euros oa EE ONE EUR E 274 Cold Weather Operation 4 us scis recie d soon 363 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 342 Compact Spare lir ues v eee cee Sd EX SOR 416 Computer Hip Travel RE RR Rd RE wean 307 Connector Bea EES EE OE EE 338 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 338 Conserving Fuel osse teehee V P RUPES EU SUR 305 N INDEX 571 Console Floor ese ES BEG 274 Console Overhead leen 253 Contract Service uus oe Gas s eos E OR a OER 561 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 511 Coole SVS 2 303 9 99 veh dia gere adds 508 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 510 Coolant Capacity n sai foc RP ERU SU RAS ES 538 Coolant Level een 509 512 Disposal of Used Coolant a ese SE HR d ss 512 Drain Flush and Refill 509 ligero PDT PIT 512 Points to Remember 41 2 22 a4 63 4 519 Dies ure iv bu ae ARE xo oma eee ER STI Radiator CAP A S ER See Seq doo d RARE e 511 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 509 538 539 Corrosion Protection 4 4 84944 44 arbre 519 Cruise Control Speed Control 220 CCUDBOIdeES 465 4 RALL 50356 ES oa ERES 270 924 Customer Assistance sn 559 Data Recorder Event 22x 64444240554 69 Daytime Brightness Interi
425. spect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front axle fluid All Wheel Drive AWD Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 32 000 miles 52 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L Engine Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the transfer case fluid All Wheel Drive AWD a a Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 546 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service 30 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule H Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 48 000 miles 78 000 km 7 Rotate the tires rotate at the first
426. ss Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in a collision e Weight distributing systems may not be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec reational vehicle dealer for additional information 452 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 lbs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Indus try Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium Dut 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy 10 000 Ibs 4 540 Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trail
427. ssary To maximize fuel economy your AWD vehicle automati cally defaults to rear wheel drive RWD when road and environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 unlikely to occur When specific road and environmental conditions require increased levels of road traction the vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera ture wheel slip or other predetermined conditions there may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip condition occurs AWD can also be manually se lected by moving the shift lever into the AutoStick mode or activating the windshield wipers for an extended period of time Drive mode RWD or AWD is displayed momentarily in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the gage area of the vehicle display when the transmission is first shifted into gear and if the drive mode changes during vehicle operation NOTE If the SERVICE AWD SYSTEM warning mes sage appears after engine start up or during driving it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly and that service is required Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information CAUTION All wheels must have the same size and type tires Unequal tire sizes must not be used Unequal tire size may cause failure of the front differential and or
428. ssion can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required 380 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fifth gear The transmission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow ing conditions are present e the shift lever is in the DRIVE position e vehicle speed is sufficiently high and e the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situa tions Operation 3 6L Engine When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode it will operate automatically shifting between the eight available gears To engage AutoStick simply tap one of the steering wheel mounted shift paddles while in DRIVE or SPORT mode When AutoStick is active the curr
429. st be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer To Activate 1 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See 2 Push the multifunction lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph 32 km h To Deactivate 1 Pull the multifunction lever toward you or rearward in car to manually deactivate the system normal opera tion of low beams 2 Push back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature If you turn the headlights park lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using the Uconnect Touch System refer to Uconnect Touch Settings in Understanding Your Instrument
430. steering wheel provides PARK RE VERSE NEUTRAL DRIVE and SPORT shift positions Once in the DRIVE range tapping the shift lever rear ward will toggle between SPORT mode and DRIVE mode You do not need to press the shift lever button when toggling between DRIVE and SPORT modes Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section Pressing the shift paddles while in the DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as Oda D derd 368 STARTING AND OPERATING M DO NOT ie DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or WARNING NEUTRAL into another gear range e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for PARK the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle This range supplements the parking brake by locking the movement and possible injury or damage transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK When parking on a level surface you may place the shift before leaving the vehicle lever in the PARK position first and then a
431. stening for a command and be returned to the main or previous menu NOTE Pressing the or buttons while the system is playing is known as Barging In refer to Barge In Overriding Prompts for further information Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing NOTE e You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to complete this procedure e The vehicle must be in PARK 1 You can do either of the following a Press the Settings hard key Page down to the Phone Bluetooth soft key press it and you will see the Paired Phones screen If there are no paired phones you will see lt Empty gt as the first device name b Press the MORE hard key then press the Phone soft key and you will go to the Uconnect Phone main screen Press the Settings soft key If there are no phones currently paired a pop up will appear If you select Yes you will go the Paired Phones screen if you select No you will return to the Uconnect Phone main menu 2 At the Paired Phones screen press the Add Device soft key and a pop up with instructions will appear 3 Search for available devices on your Bl
432. sult NOTE Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO KARANG AREA Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or riding in these areas are more likely to be seri out of the area ously injured or killed If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine Do not allow people to ride in any area of your running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 If you
433. sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The trunk lid can be released from Refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know outside the vehicle by pressing the Before Starting Your Vehicle for more information on TRUNK button on the Remote trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice within five seconds TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the Blacafd7 Trunk Release Button With the ignition in the ON RUN position the Trunk trunk lid when ens vehicle is unattended Once in Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster the trunk young children may not be able to escape indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped heat stroke With the ignition in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
434. sure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light e Four TPM sensors and e TPM Telltale Light e Receiver module 428 STARTING AND OPERATING ee The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings IN The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE message will be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pres sure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
435. system service If your seat includ ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities contact your autho rized dealer N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on for approximately four to eight seconds when the ignition is first cycled to ON RUN e The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the approximate four to eight second interval e The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the f
436. t belt Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 Power Lumbar If Eduipped Vehicles eguipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be eguipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support Power Lumbar Switch Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated using the Uconnect Touch System WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat Front Heated Seat Operation Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch
437. tem will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio volume is reduced Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro priate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and de tected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on volume will be reduced NOTE e Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system the radio volume is reduced e If the hazard flashers are on the system will request the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is re quested the radio is also muted Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always requests the chime NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or aud
438. temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first o
439. tents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery fy bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean 514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braki
440. ter e disconnect and reconnect the battery 438 STARTING AND OPERATING M e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Feder
441. ter will flash Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 additional minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition system refer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition 2 Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle e l ress LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and or passenger door open e Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone refer to Keyless Enter N Go in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion e Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 3 If any doors are open close them e For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter N Go To Disarm The System insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn The Vehicle Se
442. that have been removed for cleaning Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per Continued sonal injury Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 WARNING Continued e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel
443. the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking e Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the during a voice command period vehicle is not in motion is recommended e Performance is maximized under e Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo ak l E h h low to medium blower setting cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar e low to medium vehicle speed eye lie upyr e You can say O letter O for 0 zero l i e low road noise e Even though international dialing for most number e smooth road surface combinations is supported some shortcut dialing e fully closed windows number combinations may not be supported e a e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be l compromised with the convertible top down e Even though the system is designed for users s
444. the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column x PUSH 0316563008 Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e A Turn Signal On message will appear in the EVIC if equipped and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever i
445. the transfer case DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels 386 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure s
446. tically downshift as the vehicle slows down to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated Heavily pressing the accelerator pedal will generate an automatic downshift for improved acceleration when reasonable You can start out in first or second gear Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 383 e Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged To disengage AutoStick mode hold the shift lever to the right or press and hold the shift paddle if equipped until D is once again displayed in the instrument cluster You can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury SPORT MODE IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled dampening system This system reduces body roll and pitc
447. ties being assessed against you 440 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Continued CAUTION e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label can maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected Si ie wat operate on E 85 every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un Blaed6a9 leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles E 85 Badge NNS 1AH TING AND OPERATING 441 Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel o
448. ting element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch System Touch the Controls soft key then touch the Heated Steering Wheel soft key to turn on the heated steering wheel Press the Heated Steering Wheel soft key a second time to turn the heated steering wheel off 68 ad 10 10 NW 54 ou 1130 1310 030939992 Controls Soft Key FM 917 Vb Controls x Driver Passenger Heated Healed ep Seal IT ae Venled Veriled N 3 7 Seal Seul a lleated lt Wheel m Heated Steering Wheel Soft Key NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 Vehicles Eguipped With Remote Start On models that are eguipped with remote start the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to t
449. ting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child re straint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will co
450. tion Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 563 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diatel
451. tion and lock your vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle remove the Key Fob from vehicle cycle the ignition OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or T others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil SER RET dren should be warned not to touch the parking The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter N Go in the ACC or ON RUN mode A child could operate power windows other controls Or The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry move the vehicle RKE transmitter a Keyless Ignition Node KIN and a Do not leave children or animals inside parked RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the cause serious injury or death vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat After cycling the igniti
452. to any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 072736519 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel amp Power Outlet Console Rear 2 38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest 270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting CUPHOLDERS Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers Front Seat Cupholders vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Continued only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage The cupholders are located in the forward edge of th
453. tow this vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occut 486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km for 5 speed transmission or 30 miles 48 km for 8 speed transmission tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel lift and the transmission in NEUTRAL CAUTION Failure to follow these towing methods can cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the ground with no limitation on speed or distance Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the OFF position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS N Engine Compartment 3 6L 489 N Engine Compartment 5 7L 490 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 491 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance L EDOTOBIS S 4 oe decur dca acd aote dos Sb ew ear d 491 W Replacement Parts codec pes REeT v 493 W Dealer Service si EE 0000 eee 493 Bl Maintenance Procedures 494 BEREID i52yaceu se ee
454. trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue ee STARTING AND OPERATING 451 that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gro
455. traints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate Driver Center Passenger CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock ALR ALR ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR
456. tter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Transporting dels eager ee ER ee ees HE 81 Tread Wear Indicators 0004 418 dis Odonielet oi spas ho thee eter at aha 286 Trunk Lid Deck Lid 2 24 Dis dan 3x3 39 41 Trunk Release Remote Control 39 drunk Release Emergency serreiririerssise 41 CU SIONS is eek es EREEREER 202 286 UCI Connector 44444644468 SARA a 90799 33 He 338 Uniform Tue Quality Grades oo voe Kak Hy HOH 565 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 338 Universal Transmitter 242 aon tm Ve RR ars 255 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 62 issus 49 Ney MITEOTS case e 33x SURE RADE IG HO te 98 Vehicle Certification Label 447 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading asis 4 muore cee ew Sor 409 447 448 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Veliiele oie soe PR be ap ae eee DE 353 533 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Viscosity Engine ON x es soe gx tebe Pigs 496 497 Warning Flasher Hazard 04 464 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 286 Wamings and Catlong os wie EER DE ietis 6 Warranty Information 25 2 9 aadi sits re RR 562 Washer Adding Pd 45 tes ae yeaa ee eee 4 505 Washers Windshield 208 209 505 Washing Veliel8 24 4 84 9 sx y edv 9e RS RE RE 519 Water Divine TROU peser 9 ARE ORREL bance 386 Wheel and Wheel Trim llus 521 Wheel and Whe
457. ty Anplin Rag Times Jekyll and Mr ark 7B Hyde 030563046 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE 3 Playlist Podcast and audio book commands are only 1 You can replace the album artist song genre playlist available when the iPod is connected and playing podcast and audio book names with any corresponding i i i 4 VR commands Albums Artists and Genre names are names on the current device that is playing based on the music database provided by Gracenote 2 You can replace 8 with any track on the CD that is currently playing Command is only available when CD is playing 5 Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and shaded grey NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Screen will change to Travel Link Home Uconnect Voice Command Travel Link commands The commands can be said on any screen when a call is nol active nfter pushing the Uconnect voice command bulton We VR on the steering wheel Screen will change to Travel Link Mavie Listings screen will Screen will change to change la Travel Link Travel Link Sports Favorites Screen will Screen will change to change to Travel Link Travel Link Fuel Prices Weather Screen will change to NFL Headlines 030563045 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE 3 You can also say Show Current Weather or Show 1 You can replace NFL with any league shown on the ext
458. u will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 410 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehi
459. uel efficiency AutoStick If Equipped By using the AutoStick mode and selecting a specific gear frequent shifting can be avoided Select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts ee STARTING AND OPERATING 461 Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Two Wheel Drive and All Wheel Drive Recreational towing with all four wheels on the ground or using a tow dolly is NOT ALLOWED The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle behind an other vehicle is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flashers 464 B If Yo
460. uetooth en abled mobile phone When prompted on the phone select the Uconnect device and enter the PIN NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 4 When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone Selecting Yes will make this phone the highest priority This phone will take prece dence over other paired phones within range Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device Touch the Player hard key to begin Press the Source soft key Change the Source to Bluetooth Touch the Add Device soft key Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en abled Audio Device When prompted on the device select the Uconnect device and enter the PIN e Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen while the system is connecting e When the pairing process has successfully completed the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite device Selecting Yes will make this device the highest priority This device will take precedence over other paired devices within range NOTE If No is selected device priority is determined by the order in which it was paired The latest device paired will have the higher priority You can also use the following VR command to bring up a list of paired audio devices e Show Paired Audio Devices 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VE
461. ugh the available information displays then press SELECT to display any one of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans Temperature Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the number of hours of engine operation NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 e Tire Pressure Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE Messages Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons This feature shows the number of stored warning mes sages in the place holder Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to see what the stored messages are Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Menu Turn Menu OFF Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button Press ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display Pressing any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the menu back Uconnect TOUCH SETTINGS The Uconnect Touch system uses a combination of soft and hard keys located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features Hard Keys Hard Keys are located on the left and right side of the Uconnect Touch 4 3 screen In addition there is a Scroll Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru
462. uipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Trunk Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle To Reset The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle 2 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or a
463. ulb with your fingers Oil an authorized dealer for service contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head dealer for service lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise Front Low Beam Headlamp And Park Turn Lamp AE a SERP ae a ee an Models With High Intensity Discharge when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to Headlamps HID the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges HID Headlamps The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of 536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Backup Lamps 3 Remove cover 1 Open trunk 4 Twist the bulb one quarter turn to remove 2 Remove fastener from cover 5 Reinstall new bulb 6 Install cover and fastener 073339739 es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537 License Lamp T a 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb
464. ur Engine Overheats 464 N Jacking And Tire Changing 465 H Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage 466 O Preparations For Jacking 2 n 468 O Jacking And Changing A Tire 469 O Road Tire Installation 474 B Jump Starting Procedures 475 O Preparations For Jump btatt i segs 475 O Jump Starting Procedure lBl Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ll Shift Lever Override 5 Speed Transmission ll Manual Park Release 8 Speed Transmission 3 6L Engine Bl Towing A Disabled Vehicle 3 Without The Ignition Key 464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR EN
465. ure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 415 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipm
466. ure for this tire The maximum inflation pres sure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 408 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire And Loading Information Placard Location DEERE ARES E SRA PSERIOR ERIE RE RS AT ESS RE hd MRT Ro SEER IE EVER ELIE RITS NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed dee kes Mrd d SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 1 on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door 2 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 3 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 6OPSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an AN 1 09268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle Yo
467. ure is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on ap proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection touch the Headlights With Wipers soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 e Auto Dim High Beams If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection touch the Auto High Beams soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu Refer to Lights SmartBeam If Equipped in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information e Daytime Running Lights When this feature is selected the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running To make your selection touch the Daytime Running Lights soft key until a check mark appears next to setting showing that setting has been selected Touch the back arrow soft key to return to the previous menu e Steering Directed Lights When this feature is selected the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering w
468. urn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 5 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 6 High Beam Indicator ED This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 7 Odometer Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 U S Federal regulations reguire that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The Electronic
469. us injury or death Rear Head Restraints dom The center rear head restraint has two positions up or down When the seat is being occupied the head restraint should raised When there are no occupants in the center Push Button seat position the head restraint can be lowered for NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by maximum visibility for the driver qualified technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer 030907490 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head Folding Rear Seat restraint To lower the head restraint press the push The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an button located at the base of the head restraint and push additional storage area To fold the rear seatback pull on downward on the head restraint the loops located on the upper seatback NOTE These loops can be tucked away when not in use 022636837 Push Button NOTE The outboard head restraints are not adjustable Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know ag Before Starting Your Vehicle for tether routing Rear Seatback Loop 030936862 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for
470. use Spare Fue Spare EE Iun Ces Fuse Spare Bl e j Fuse Spae 15 Amp Tllumination Rear 10 Amp Airbag Module Blue Sunshade Red 6 Fuse Spare Fuse Spare 70 Fue Spare j Fuse Spae E NN N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533 VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lamps W5W Rear Compartment Trunk Lamp 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamp 578 Vibor Vanity DOIS s ce disce e OTR Ge oh ed ns A6220 Glove Box Lamp If Equipped 194 Door COMICS x93 eee aoa 6e HR bnew AE 562 Shift Indicator Lamp 2442223 6s REED gt oi JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or
471. use block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data re
472. use severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower An chors and Tether for CHildren LATCH All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the
473. with John Doe or if there are multiple numbers it will ask which number you want to call for John Doe Call Controls e After the Listening prompt and the following beep The touch screen allows you to control the following call say Dial 248 555 1212 features Dial By Saying A Number e Press the button to begin e The Uconnect Phone will dial the number e Answer 248 555 1212 End e Ignore Hold unhold Mute unmute 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Transfer the call to from the phone Recent Calls You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the following call types e Join 2 active calls together 68 qf FM 91 7 10 10 NW 54 ou Ww 72 Touch Tone Number Entry Recent calls gt All Ca x R e Touch the Phone soft key 7 Ana Conda a Axel Schweiss e Swap 2 active calls e Touch the Dial soft key J Buddy s Pizza e The Touch Tone screen will be displayed ZI 248 990 6543 X James Buttl e Use the numbered soft keys to enter the number and SL SHUTE DOT touch Call 2 D Dennett To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition VR press the button while in a call and say Send 1234 or you can say Send Voicemail Password if Voicemail pass e Incoming Calls word is stored in your mobile phonebook e Outgoing Calls e Missed Calls N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 e All Calls These can be accessed by touching the rece
474. ximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove 520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Special Care Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month ee Ud ee power ou ng e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges finish y 5 P of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open CAUTION e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e Do not use abrasive
475. y the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone and one audio device can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Uconnect Phone Button The Uconnect Phone Button is used to get amp into the phone mode and make calls show recent incoming outgoing calls view phone book etc When you press the button you will hear a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Uconnect Voice Command Button The Uconnect Voice Command Button is i VR only used for barge in and when you are already in a call and you want to send Tones or make another call 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect
476. y Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 564 e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED C
477. y simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Uconnect Touch System Set tings in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode Manual Operation The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tion
478. y to turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touch screen button soft key is pressed To change the Touch Screen Beep setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key then touch the arrow back soft key e Fuel Saver Display Touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key to turn the ECO message located in the instrument cluster display on or off To make your selection touch the Fuel Saver Display soft key and select ON or OFF Then touch the arrow back soft key Clock e Set Time Touch the Set Time soft key to change this display When in this display you may select the time display settings To make your selection touch the Set Time soft key adjust the hours and minutes using the up and down soft keys select AM or PM select 12 hr or 24 hr Then touch the arrow back soft key when all selections are complete e Show Time Status Touch the Show Time Status soft key to change this display When in this display you may turn on or shut off N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 the digital clock in the status bar To change the Show Time Status setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key e Sync Time Touch the Sync Time soft key to change this display When in this display you may have the radio set the time automatically To change the Sync Time setting press and release the ON or OFF soft key Then touch the arrow back soft key Safety Assistance e Front Collision Wa
479. you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging On systems with Manual Climate Controls the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Mix Floor and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be dis abled automatically if these modes are selected Attempt ing to use Recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Temperature Control ATC ATC Hard keys are located in the center of the instru ment panel Soft keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch system screen Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO hard key or soft key button 9 on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature hard or soft control buttons 6 7 10 11 Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency b
480. ystem it can be done vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver standing Your Instrument Panel for further information is responsible for braking the vehicle down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 Ready Alert Braking Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver When the throttle is released very quickly Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake pressure This brake pressure will not be noticed by the driver The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes Rain Brake Support Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in wet conditions It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rot

2012 Dodge Charger Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents